# TUODI International — full site text

TUODI makes rechargeable sensor cabinet lights, sensor switches and modules, white noise machines, night lights and camping and work lights; its current production base is Guangdong Tuodi Electronics in Zhaoqing, China, and TUODI International is its international sales arm. This file holds the full text of every page: product specifications, indicative prices, buying guides and company information. Summary and page list: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/llms.txt. Your quotation states the final configuration and order terms.

========================================================================
# Sensor Cabinet Lights & PIR Switches Manufacturer, China | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/
Summary: TUODI makes sensor cabinet lights, PIR and radar switches and white noise machines; factory in Zhaoqing, China. 79 granted patents; OEM and private label.

## Rechargeable sensor cabinet lights,
made in Zhaoqing, China.
Rechargeable PIR, radar and hand-wave cabinet lights for your brand. TDL-6110X from US$4.91 a unit at 100–500 units (12, 23 or 60 cm builds). Lead time depends on the product; as a guide, samples take 3–5 days and standard bulk orders 20–25 days from order and payment. Certificates and test reports list the models they name. Current production is at Guangdong Tuodi Electronics in Sihui, Zhaoqing; your quotation names the legal manufacturer for your model.
Get a quote on WhatsAppSee the cabinet lights →

![TUODI rechargeable sensor light bar lighting a wardrobe](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110-shelf.jpg)
Rechargeable sensor light barsFor kitchen cabinets, wardrobes and displays↗

Since 2005making sensor switches; incorporated in Shenzhen in 2007
79granted patents: 63 Chinese and 16 international
~1 millionunits of annual output at the Zhaoqing factory
~68%of output exported to the Americas, Europe, Southeast and East Asia, Africa and Oceania
Russia & Turkeylighting expos, including IstanbulLight

The 2005 start, annual output and export share are figures supplied by the factory.

## Product ranges

Sensor cabinet lights and sensor controls are the core line. White noise machines, night lights and portable lights complete the range.

![TUODI TDL-6110X rechargeable PIR cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-render-1.jpg)

## Sensor Cabinet Lights
Rechargeable PIR, microwave-radar, hand-wave and remote-control light bars for furniture and interiors.
TDL-6110X from US$4.91 a unit at 100–500 units (12, 23 or 60 cm)
See the range ↗

![TUODI TDL-1915 microwave sensor switch](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-1915-hero.jpg)

## Switches & Modules
PIR, radar, photocell, timer, gesture and board-level sensor products for lighting brands.
See the range ↗

![TUODI TDL-MC220 white noise machine with night light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-mc220-card.jpg)

## White Noise Machines
40-sound, Bluetooth, night-light and clock variants across the MC220, MC330 and MC550 families.
TDL-MC220 from US$9.61 a unit at 100–500 units
See the range ↗

![TUODI LB-01 carrot-shaped night light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/lb01-carrot.jpg)

## Night Lights
Portable nursery and bedside platforms including the MC550 series and LB-01 carrot lamp.
LB-01 from US$4.60 a unit at 100–500 units
See the range ↗

![TUODI TD-CL05 magnetic folding motion sensor work light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/td-cl05-card.jpg)

## Camping & Work Lights
Rechargeable magnetic lights with flood, spot, red and blue modes in clip-on and folding formats.
See the range ↗

![TUODI SR series touchless faucet adapter](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/sr-faucet-features.jpg)

## Touchless Faucet Adapters
SR-M01 short-flow and SR-T01 long-flow touchless adapters for taps, with M22/M24 fittings.
From US$16.28 a unit at 100–500 units
See the adapters ↗

## Start with these
cabinet lights.

All models in the Product Finder →

## TDL-6110X ↗
Rechargeable PIR light bar with magnet and adhesive-plate mounting.
US$4.91–13.05 a unit at 100–500 units (12, 23 or 60 cm)
PIR >3 m / 120°
Tri-CCT
Magnet + adhesive plates
Ask about TDL-6110X

![TDL-6110X-IR hand-wave and touch cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-ir.jpg)

## TDL-6110X-IR ↗
Hand-wave and touch control for displays and work surfaces.
US$4.91–13.05 a unit at 100–500 units (12, 23, 40 or 60 cm)
Hand-wave IR + touch
12, 23, 40 and 60 cm
Brightness memory
Ask about TDL-6110X-IR

![TDL-6111 detachable battery sensor-light format](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-battery-card.jpg)

## TDL-6111 ↗
Removable battery card: charge the card and leave the light bar installed.
Illustration of the removable-card design. Confirm the battery capacity for the selected build on the quotation.
Ask about TDL-6111

![TDL-6110XRF-DJ 9 mm slim remote-control light bar](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110xrf-dj-remote-2.jpg)

## TDL-6110XRF-DJ ↗
Spliceable remote-controlled bars for a grouped furniture layout.
25 cm bars join magnetically
PIR + 2.4G remote
1500 mAh per bar
Ask about TDL-6110XRF-DJ

Need permanent power? See the supply-powered TDL-7148 in the Product Finder.

![Laser marking a TUODI logo on an aluminium sensor-light housing](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-laser-marking.jpg)
Laser marking a logo on an aluminium light housing

## Your brand on it
Put your own brand, packaging and tweaks on an existing TUODI platform (OEM), or develop a new product with the factory's engineers (ODM).
Logo printing or laser engraving
Custom colourways
Giftbox and blister packaging
Multi-language manuals
Sensing behaviour: range, hold time, daylight threshold
Sound libraries on white noise machines
The sample you approve becomes the golden sample for your production run.
Discuss private labelHow OEM and ODM projects run →

## Inside the Zhaoqing factory

The current production base is Guangdong Tuodi Electronics in Sihui, Zhaoqing, on equipment the factory lists as 2 SMT placement machines, an 8-temperature-zone reflow oven, CNC machining, laser marking, 2 integrating spheres and 4 ageing racks. Products hold CE, RoHS, FCC, PSE and UKCA documents by model (the sensor switch range is not certified as standard), and TUODI International, the factory's international sales arm, handles your enquiry, samples and export arrangements in English.

![Reception at the current TUODI factory in Zhaoqing](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-reception-entrance.jpg)
Zhaoqing factory reception

![Integrating sphere photometric equipment at the factory](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/lab-integrating-sphere.jpg)
Integrating sphere for light-output measurement

![TUODI stand E-110 at the IstanbulLight international lighting fair](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tradeshow-istanbul-2.jpg)
IstanbulLight fair, stand E-110

Tour the factory Book a live video tour

## How an order runs

## Quote
Send the model, quantity and destination. A real person replies in English, usually within one business day; the quotation gives pricing, MOQ and lead time.

## Sample you approve
Samples take 3–5 days as a guide. The approved sample sets the standard for the run.

## Production
Standard bulk orders take 20–25 days as a guide, or 25–30 days with a custom logo or packaging, counted from when you place the order and pay for the goods. Lead time depends on the product.

## Inspection and shipping
Inspect by live video, a third-party inspector or a visit, then ship by courier, air or sea, with RyanFulfil-coordinated shipping or your own forwarder. Prices include delivery within China; international freight is quoted separately. The quotation states the route, charges and responsibilities.

Payment: the cost of goods in full when you place the order; any other charges on your quotation in full before the goods ship.

What protects your order: production runs against the sample you approve; you can inspect by live video, a visit or a third-party inspector before shipment; by the factory's figures, TDL-6110X 30 and 40 cm builds carry a one-year warranty whose DOA definition, return freight and remedy are set on your proforma invoice; and for a verified factory defect, replacement units can be included with your next shipment, with the remedy and freight agreed case by case and confirmed in writing, including what happens if you have no further order planned. After-sales and warranty by model.

## Buyer questions

Who makes TUODI products?

Current production is at Guangdong Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd., TUODI's factory in Sihui, Zhaoqing, Guangdong, China. Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd., incorporated in 2007, is the headquarters and R&D office and holds TUODI's design patents. TUODI International is the factory's international sales arm, handling enquiries, quotations, samples and export arrangements in English. Your quotation names the legal manufacturer and document holder for your model.

What is the MOQ?

It depends on the model and the customisation. There are four levels: samples of stock models, stock product, logo and packaging, and full custom development. Send the model and your target quantity on WhatsApp for the number at your level.

Can I get a sample, and how long does production take?

Yes. Sampling before a production order is the normal flow, and samples are quoted as one combined goods-and-shipping amount. Lead time depends on the product; as a guide, samples take 3–5 days and standard bulk orders 20–25 days, or 25–30 days with a custom logo or packaging.

Can you put my brand on it?

Yes: logo printing or laser engraving, custom colourways, giftbox and blister packaging, multi-language manuals, sensing-behaviour tuning and sound-library changes on white noise machines. Production runs against the sample you approve.

Which certificates do the products hold?

Products hold CE, RoHS, FCC, PSE (Japan) and UKCA documents, by model and market. The Bluetooth white-noise platform has granted FCC ID 2A8ZP-MC330 and Japan Giteki radio certification R 219-248097. Sensor switches are not certified as standard; certification can sometimes be arranged per project.

All buyer answers →

## Get a price for your model.

Send the model, quantity and destination country. The reply comes from a real person, in English, usually within one business day.

Chat on WhatsAppEmail sales@tuodiinternational.comUse the enquiry form ↗

Notes

Incorporation in Shenzhen in 2007 is from the business licence; the equipment list is supplied by the factory.

Indicative prices are wholesale US dollars per unit for the quantity and the configurations listed in the Product Finder. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and price validity are set on your quotation.

Lead times are planning guides; shipping transit is additional, and your proforma invoice states the dated completion estimate.

Certificates and test reports cover the models they name, not the whole range. Factory photographs show the equipment on site; results for a specific model come from its documents and your sample.

Specifications differ by model and length; each model page lists its configurations. For TDL-7148, the supply, length, mounting and control are set on your quotation and sample. For camping and work lights, the market documents and the battery shipping route are set per model.

Published values are the factory's current figures unless identified as independently checked.

Your quotation names the seller, invoice issuer, legal manufacturer and document holder for your model. Older company and certification records may name Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd.

========================================================================
# Sensor Lights & Switches: Models, Specs, Prices, China | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/products/
Summary: Compare TUODI product families by sensing, power, key specs and indicative wholesale ranges, plus selected export packing data for freight planning.

Home › Product Finder

## Product Finder — the published TUODI range at a glance

 Every published TUODI model in one table: filter by category, search by model number or spec, and jump to the detail page. Prices are indicative wholesale and quantity-tiered.

 Starting points for lighting and control enquiries.
 For lighting, start with the TDL-6110X rechargeable PIR cabinet light, TDL-6111 detachable-battery light or TD-CL04 / LX-CL04 clip-on camping light.

 For lighting control, compare TDL-9953 ceiling switches, TDL-2025 low-voltage LED-strip controllers and the TDL-2115 countdown timer.

 Shortlist before you enquire. Select up to four models to compare the published sensing, power and key-spec notes side by side. The shortlist stays in this browser tab only; it adds the chosen models to a structured WhatsApp enquiry without submitting a form.

 All
 Cabinet & wardrobe
 Switches & modules
 White noise & night
 Camping & work
 Water control

 Prices are indicative wholesale and quantity-tiered. They include delivery within China; international freight is quoted separately. What moves a model inside its range →

 Model | Product | Sensing / control | Power | Key specs | Indicative US$/unit | Page | Shortlist

TDL-6110X family | Rechargeable sensor cabinet light bar | PIR >3 m / 120° | 300–4400 mAh by length | Priced lengths: 12, 23 and 60 cm. Quotation-only revisions: 30 cm 180 lm / 2200 mAh and 40 cm 220 lm / 3000 mAh · tri-CCT · magnet + adhesive plates | $4.91–13.05 / 100–500 units — PIR 12, 23 or 60 cm only; 30 / 40 cm quoted per order | Model guide

TDL-6110X-IR | Hand-sweep cabinet light bar | Hand-wave IR + touch | 300–2200 mAh by length | 4 lengths: 12, 23, 40 and 60 cm · brightness memory | $4.91–13.05 / 100–500 units | Model guide

TDL-6110XWB | Radar sensor cabinet light | Microwave radar <3 m / 150° | 1500–4500 mAh | 24 cm 74 lm · 38 cm 205 lm · 58 cm 225 lm · 150° beam · 15 s hold · 10 lux threshold | $7.94–13.57 / 100–500 units | Cabinet lights

 TDL-6110XRF-DJ | Spliceable remote cabinet light | PIR 3 m / 90° + 2.4G remote | 1500 mAh/bar | 25 cm bars join magnetically · 120 lm · CRI 80 | Quoted per order | Model guide

TDL-6111 | Removable-battery sensor bar | — | Detachable battery card | 35 cm configured span
25 cm light section + 10 cm battery card

Power: 1.3 W
Light output: 136 lm

Enquire about 35 cm configured span

54 cm configured span
40 cm light section + 14 cm battery card

Battery capacity: 3000 mAh
Power: 2 W
Light output: 208 lm
LED count: 146 LEDs
Hold time: 15 s

Enquire about 54 cm configured span
 | Quoted per order | Model guide

TDL-7148 | Supply-powered cabinet light bar | Set per build | External power supply; voltage on quotation | Length, mounting and control set per order. Factory video shows an ageing run, without a documented test result. | Quoted per order | Ageing-run video

TDL-6108A | Big-battery sensor light | PIR >3 m / 120° | 4000 mAh | 380 mm · 170 lm · CRI >80 · 4000 mAh | $9.14 / minimum 1,000 units | Cabinet lights

TDL-7120 | AAA-battery sensor light bar | PIR + daylight sensor | 4 × AAA | Magnetic strip mount · daylight sensor · 4 × AAA | Quoted per order | Cabinet lights

TDL-7127 | Safe & strongbox light, twin-head | PIR >3 m / 140° | 3 × AAA | 50/36/24 lm steps · white or silver | $4.66 (white); silver quoted per order / minimum 1,000 units | Cabinet lights

TDL-7134 | Wireless picture & display light | Remote (dim + timer) | 4 × C batteries | 120 lm · 3000 K · CRI >85 · rotating head | $8.87 / 100–500 units | Cabinet lights

TDL-8192 / 8193 | Detachable light tube & ambient bar | Scene modes | 8192: rechargeable, base charging; 8193: 5 V / 12 V powered builds, quoted separately | Tube lifts off base as hand lamp (8192) · gaming/party/reading/sleep scenes (8193) | $20.50 / minimum 1,000 units — 8192 only; 8193B-5V / 12V quoted separately | Cabinet lights

 TDL-7126S | Surface-mount corridor light | PIR 3 m / 140° + daylight | 4 × AAA | 305 mm · IP20 · adjustable bracket · 3 colours | Quoted per order | Hotel & corridor

TDL-MC220 | Portable white noise machine | — | Rechargeable, USB-C | 40 sounds · night light · Bluetooth · 5 finishes | $9.61 / 100–500 units | White noise

MC330 | White noise + clock + BT speaker | — | Rechargeable | 40 sounds · clock display · grey or wood finish | Quoted per order | Model guide

MC550TIME / MC550BL / MC550RF | Nursery lamp series (clock / white-noise / colour) | Touch · BT 5.3 · remote | 1500–2200 mAh | 22 h (TIME) · 11 h (BL) · 10 h (RF) · carry handle | $8.77–12.12 / 100–500 units | Night lights

LB-01 | Carrot night light | Microwave radar 2–3 m / 360° | USB 5 V or battery base | 0.13 W · CRI 80 · −10 to +55 °C | $4.60–7.94 / 100–500 units | Night lights

TDL-7136A/B · 7133A/B | Sensor sconce night lights | PIR + daylight sensor | A: AA dry cells; B: rechargeable lithium battery | Wall sconce · 3M pads or screws, both kits in box | 7136A/B $5.85–7.94 / 100–500 units; 7133A/B $5.78–7.64 / minimum 1,000 units | Night lights

TDL-7125A | Sensor puck light | PIR + daylight sensor | Battery | Adhesive or magnetic mount · interlinked 2.4G versions | Quoted per order | Cabinet lights

TD-CL04 | Clip-on magnetic EDC light (LX-CL04) | Manual, 4 modes | 600 mAh | 350 lm flood · red/blue · IPX6 marking · 60 g alu | Quoted per order | Camping & work

TD-CL05 | Folding motion-sensor work light | PIR 3 m / 30 s | 600 mAh | COB · magnetic base · IPX6 marking · 182 g | Quoted per order | Camping & work

TDL-6113 | Camping & home light bar | PIR >5 m / 140° | 3000 mAh | 400 lm · hook + magnet · 430 mm | Quoted per order | Camping & work

 TDL-2100BJ | Swivel-head PIR switch — run-out | PIR 7–10 m | 220 V AC | 800 W · 5–500 lux · 30–350 s hold · discontinued, stock being cleared — not for new designs | while stock lasts | Sensor switches

 TDL-1915 | Microwave ceiling switch (5.8 GHz) | Radar 2–16 m adjustable | AC 85–250 V | 10 A · LED ≤150 W / incandescent ≤800 W / exhaust fan ≤200 W; tell us the exact load and its starting current · 8 s–12 min · 2–2000 lux · no radio certificate | Quoted per order | Microwave switches

 TDL-2076WB | Plug-through microwave switch (5.8 GHz) | Radar up to 8 m / 360° · six sensitivity steps | 85–277 V AC | 3 / 15 / 30 / 60 s · incandescent 1200 W · CFL / fluorescent 600 W · LED 150 W · indoor only; IP54 is self-declared, not third-party tested | Quoted per order | Microwave switches

 TDL-9956J / 9959J | Recessed ceiling occupancy switch | PIR | Mains | 10 A relay · spring-clip mounting · Tuya variant | Quoted per order | Sensor switches

 TDL-2200J | 86-type wall-plate PIR switch | PIR 5–8 m | 100–240 V AC | 10 A · delay 30 s / 3.5 min / 6 min · 3-step daylight · 86 × 86 × 43 mm · Excelitas PIR · 4 mm² terminals | Quoted per order | Sensor switches

 TDL-2280J | 86-type wall-plate PIR switch | PIR | Set per build | Available to quote (September 2026). Quantity, electrical specification, report/build revision and lead time are set on your quotation | Quoted per order | Sensor switches

 TDL-9952 · TDL-9953 · TDL-7159 · TDL-2076-EX | Presence and microwave switches / modules | 24 GHz presence; TDL-9953B-J: 5.8 GHz microwave | Mains or 12 V DC by exact TDL-9953 variant | TDL-9953BJ-DC: dry-contact output; compare suffix-specific range and delay. Stationary-presence behaviour needs a room test. No radio certificate yet — compare variants | Quoted per order | Sensor switches

 TDL-2025 family | Low-voltage LED-strip controller | PIR + daylight; CDS: photocell only | Base/CDS: 6–24 V DC; USB/Type-C: 5 V DC | 5 A base/CDS; 2 A USB/Type-C. PIR delay 18–360 s; external supply. Internal reports only; no certification-body certificates. | Quoted per order | Controller variants

 TDL-2116 | 3-step countdown timer plate | Push-button timer | 100–265 V AC | 16 A relay · ladders to 6 h · 86-type | Quoted per order | Timer switches

 TDL-2115 | DIP-set timer plate | DIP-set countdown | 240 V AC | 16 A / 3500 W · locator light · −10 to +50 °C · 86 × 86 × 30 mm | Quoted per order | Timer switches

 GK-AC-220V | Dusk-to-dawn photocell switch | Light-level | 85–277 V AC | 600 W · IP66 is the factory's own marking, not third-party tested · ON <5 lux / OFF >15 lux | Quoted per order | Photocell switches

 TDL-2086CDS | Compact photocell switch | Light-level | 85–277 V AC | 300 W · ON <10 lux / OFF >30 lux | Quoted per order | Photocell switches

 TDL-7158WB-T | Hand-wave inline switch for T5/T8 | 10 GHz hand-wave <30 cm | 100–240 V AC | 300 W · C7/C8 plug-through · touchless near-field control | Quoted per order | Hand-wave switches

 TDL-2012-AJ | Retrofit PIR module + probe | PIR 3–5 m / 140° | 220 V AC | 200 W max · six delay steps 15 s – 30 min · 18 mm screw-in probe · 0.055 W standby | Quoted per order | OEM modules

 TDL-2201 | 12 V-to-mains relay interface | Logic input, DIP-set | 100–240 V AC | 500 W · built-in 12 V/150 mA sensor supply | Quoted per order | OEM modules

SR-M01 | Touchless faucet adapter (short-flow) | Proximity IR, hands near the spout | 4000 mAh — 5–10 yrs | IPX6 marking · M22/M24 adapters · 3-yr warranty · 180 s auto-stop | $16.28 / 100–500 units | Sensor switches

SR-T01 | Touchless faucet adapter (long-flow) | Hand-wave toggle | 4000 mAh — 5–10 yrs | IPX6 marking · M22/M24 adapters · 3-yr warranty · 180 s auto-stop | $16.28 / 100–500 units | Sensor switches

## Your shortlist
0 models selected

 Clear shortlist

 Published figures are starting points; your quotation sets the exact configuration, destination documents, price tier and sample path for each selected model.

 Send shortlist on WhatsApp
 Build detailed RFQ
 Build sample plan

## Export packing snapshots

 Factory packing figures (August 2026) for first-pass freight and storage planning. A custom box, manual, accessory set or battery configuration changes the pack-out, so the proforma invoice reconfirms every figure. Swipe sideways on a small screen.

 Model / configuration | Individual box (mm) | Quantity / master | Master carton (mm) | Carton weight

 TDL-6110X · 23 cm | 245 × 45 × 20 | 100 pcs | 490 × 265 × 330 | 18 kg stated

 TDL-6110X · 30 cm | Not stated | 60 pcs | 335 × 335 × 290 | 15 / 14.5 kg gross / net

 TDL-6110X · 40 cm | Not stated | 48 pcs | 425 × 270 × 300 | 14.5 / 14 kg gross / net

 TDL-6110X · 60 cm | 615 × 45 × 20 | 40 pcs | 628 × 270 × 245 | 15 kg stated

 TDL-6110XWB · 24 cm | 250 × 45 × 30 | 48 pcs | 425 × 270 × 300 | 13 kg stated

 TDL-6110XWB · 38 cm | 390 × 45 × 30 | 48 pcs | 425 × 270 × 300 | 12.5 kg stated

 TDL-6110XWB · 58 cm | 590 × 45 × 30 | 40 pcs | 605 × 270 × 245 | 14.5 kg stated

 TDL-6110XRF-DJ · 25 cm set | Not stated; 1 light + 1 remote | 50 sets | 540 × 225 × 255 | 14 kg stated

 TDL-6111 · 35 cm configured span | 265 × 50 × 40 mm | 60 sets | 425 × 270 × 300 mm | 13 kg

TDL-6111 · 54 cm configured span | 415 × 50 × 40 mm | 30 sets | 425 × 270 × 300 mm | 10 kg

 TDL-MC220 | 95 × 95 × 48 | 100 pcs | 495 × 265 × 410 | 15.8 kg stated

 MC330 | 170 × 148 × 100 | 30 pcs | 525 × 365 × 470 | 13.4 kg stated

 MC550RF / MC550TIME / MC550BL | 100 × 100 × 130 | 48 pcs | 495 × 265 × 410 | 13.5 / 14 / 14.5 kg stated, respectively

 TD-CL04 | 120 × 60 × 37 | 100 pcs | 400 × 260 × 325 | 11 kg stated

 TDL-6113 | 445 × 45 × 30 | 40 pcs | 455 × 300 × 255 | 13 kg stated

 “Stated” means the factory did not say whether the carton weight is gross or net. TD-CL05 packing data is still awaited from the factory.

 Don't see your product? This table covers the published range — the factory catalogue is larger (interlinked wall/footlight systems, LED strips, key-card switches, Tuya RGB lines and more). Describe what you need and the team will match it. Ask on WhatsApp →

 Related: what drives the price choosing a sensor technology quality comparison & testing buyer FAQ & pricing shipping & delivery OEM / ODM 2026–2027 market brief TUODI, Weichun, Xiuben and iLamp range comparison

 Notes

 Quotation review: 13 September 2026. Indicative USD product prices depend on the selected model, configuration and quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and current price validity are confirmed on quotation.

 Specify the exact variant, application and destination; document coverage is checked for that build.

 We help promote TUODI International, Weichun Lighting, Xiuben Lighting and iLamp Technology; the range comparison covers their published ranges only, not component compatibility or which product performs better.

 35 cm: Battery capacity to be confirmed on your quotation.

54 cm: 3000 mAh — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.

========================================================================
# White Noise & Sleep Sound Machine OEM Manufacturer | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/white-noise-machines/
Summary: MC220, MC330 and MC550 white noise and sleep sound machines from TUODI for OEM and private label, with Bluetooth, night-light and clock variants.

Home › White Noise Machines

## White Noise & Sleep Sound Machines — OEM & Private Label

 All models below are developed by TUODI and produced at the current factory in Zhaoqing, Guangdong, and can be customised with your brand, packaging, sound library tuning and colourways. Quantities, pricing and current MOQs come with your quotation.

## Choose a sound-machine platform

 Starting point | Platform | Published configuration

Portable white noise with a night light | Portable White Noise Machine (TDL-MC220) | Portable sound machine with night light and Bluetooth.

 Bedside sound machine with a clock | MC330 model guide | White noise, clock display and Bluetooth speaker.

 Nursery-lamp platform with a white-noise variant | TDL-MC550 series | White-noise variant; clock and colour variants are specified by exact suffix in the quotation.

 See the OEM / ODM process →

 Build a sound-machine enquiry

 Documents on file: the FCC grant, the RoHS lab attestation and the Japan radio certificate, each naming its own models.

![TUODI TDL-MC220 portable white noise machine, grey fabric finish](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-mc220.jpg)

![TDL-MC220 on a cot, a stroller, luggage and a desk](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-mc220-scenes.jpg)

![TDL-MC220 white noise machine, top panel and colourway options](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/mc220-colourways.jpg)

 TDL-MC220

## Portable White Noise Machine with Night Light & Bluetooth

 Compact fabric-finish sound machine for adults and children — for sleep, office privacy and travel. Hangs from a cot, stroller or luggage by its strap.

 40 soothing sounds: white noise, fan sounds, lullabies and nature sounds

 Multi-colour night light with adjustable brightness

 3 auto-off timer settings (30 / 60 / 90 minutes) or continuous play

 800 mAh battery — quoted at about 8 h local playback or 6 h over Bluetooth, ~2 h recharge; Bluetooth 5.3, Φ40 mm 3 W speaker

 Memory function — resumes your last sound and volume

 Bluetooth audio playback, USB-C charging

 Finishes: grid-white, grid-black, grid-grey, fabric-white, fabric-black

 Indicative wholesale: US$9.61 / unit · 100–500 units

 Ask about TDL-MC220

![TUODI MC330 white noise machine, wood-grain finish, three-quarter view](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/mc330-wood.jpg)

![TUODI MC330 grey finish, front and rear view showing the button panel](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/mc330-grey.jpg)

 MC330
 MC330 model page: specifications and documents →

## White Noise Machine + Clock + Bluetooth Speaker

 Three functions in one bedside unit: a sleep sound machine, a dimmed clock you can read in the dark, and a Bluetooth speaker for your own music. The fabric-and-ring design doubles as bedroom décor.

 40 built-in sounds — birdsong, thunder, ocean waves, rain, lullabies, fan and light music

 Clock display with low-glow night setting

 Bluetooth playback from your phone

 Three timer settings (30 / 60 / 90 minutes), plus memory function

 1500 mAh battery — quoted at about 11 h local playback, 10 h over Bluetooth, 4 h recharge; Bluetooth 5.3, Φ52 mm 3 W speaker

 Grey and wood-look finishes; CE, RoHS and FCC documentation for this model

 Lightweight, one-button operation — suitable for adults, children and light sleepers

 Quoted per order for the selected configuration.

 See the published FCC grant.

 Ask about MC330

![TUODI MC550 nursery lamp, warm-lit](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/mc550bl-warm.jpg)

![MC550 nursery lamp top panel](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/mc550bl-lit.jpg)

 TDL-MC550 series

## MC550 Nursery Lamp Series — White-Noise Variant

 The MC550 is TUODI's portable nursery-lamp platform, produced in several configurations. The 4-in-1 white-noise variant combines a baby night light, a white noise machine, a Bluetooth speaker and a carry-anywhere portable lamp.

 Built-in white-noise and soothing sound library — 40 sounds; Bluetooth 5.3, Φ40 mm 3 W speaker

 1500 mAh battery — quoted at 11 h at full brightness, 5.5 h charge; about 18 h music at 50% volume with the night light on; stepless dimming at a single colour temperature (the clock variant has three)

 Carry handle; doodle-friendly blank shell kids can decorate; 97 × 86 × 110 mm, 48 pcs/carton

 Clock variant (MC550TIME; MC550T on older paperwork): 2200 mAh — 22 h at full brightness, 5.5 h charge; touch controls, Type-C, CRI 80

 Colour variant (MC550RF; MC550IR in older media): 20 ambient modes with remote, 2200 mAh — 10 h. The quotation states the exact suffix and remote protocol

 See the full series on the Night Lights page.

 Indicative wholesale: MC550BL white-noise model US$12.12 / unit; MC550TIME clock model US$9.40 / unit; MC550RF colour lamp US$8.77 / unit · 100–500 units

 Ask about the MC550 series

 OEM & private label. Sound libraries, housings, colours, packaging and manuals can be customised for your market. Health or medical sleep-treatment claims are not made for these products — they are sold as comfort and sound-masking devices. See the OEM/ODM process →

 Related: white-noise RFQ questions what drives the price quality comparison & testing nursery night light manufacturer private label white noise machines buyer FAQ

 Notes

 Quotation review: 13 September 2026. Indicative USD product prices depend on the selected model, configuration and quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and current price validity are confirmed on quotation.

 For every OEM or private-label project, confirm the exact model, sound library, finish, packaging and destination-market documents before approval.

 Check the named model and exact ordered suffix on each document; a record naming MC550 does not establish coverage for every MC550 variant. For MC330, confirm the offered build and destination documents.

 Battery runtimes are factory quotes; confirm runtime on your sample.

========================================================================
# MC330 White Noise Machine with Clock OEM | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/mc330-white-noise-clock-oem/
Summary: Compare MC330 white noise clock specifications, MC220 alternatives, runtime limits and model-specific documents. Plan an OEM sample and quotation.

Home › White noise machines › MC330

## MC330 White Noise Machine with Clock — OEM & Private Label

 A bedside white noise machine with a clock: 40 built-in sounds, a clock display and Bluetooth playback in one model, a starting point for branded sleep-sound ranges.

 40 sounds
Clock display
Bluetooth playback
1500 mAh battery
Grey or wood-look

 Quote MC330 on WhatsAppBuild an enquiry for MC330

![MC330 white noise machine in a wood-look finish](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/mc330-wood.jpg)

 MC330 in a wood-look finish.

 On this pageBest forSpecificationsCompare MC220Certificates and documentsNotes

## Best for

 The clock-equipped choice in the white-noise range: white-noise machine, clock display and Bluetooth speaker in one bedside unit. For a portable model with a strap and night light, see the MC220.

 For an OEM or private-label brief, name MC330 and the intended finish, packaging, sound library and destination market.

## MC330 specifications

 MC330 published configuration
 Built-in sound count | 40

 Clock and wireless playback | Clock display; Bluetooth playback

 Timer | 30 / 60 / 90 minutes

 Battery | 1500 mAh

 Runtime and recharge estimates | About 11 h local playback; about 10 h Bluetooth playback; about 4 h recharge (factory estimates)

 Speaker | Φ52 mm, 4 Ω, 3 W

 Dimensions | 142 × 89 × 161 mm

 Published finishes | Grey and wood-look

## MC220 and MC330 compared

 Compare the published configurations before selecting a platform
Attribute | Portable White Noise Machine (TDL-MC220) | White Noise Machine with Clock (MC330)

 Published form / features | Portable sound machine with night light and Bluetooth | White-noise machine with clock display and Bluetooth playback

 Built-in sounds / timer | 40; 30 / 60 / 90 minutes | 40; 30 / 60 / 90 minutes

 Battery and stated runtime | 800 mAh; about 8 h local / 6 h Bluetooth; about 2 h recharge | 1500 mAh; about 11 h local / 10 h Bluetooth; about 4 h recharge

 Speaker / dimensions | Φ40 mm, 3 W; 86 × 86 × 40 mm | Φ52 mm, 4 Ω, 3 W; 142 × 89 × 161 mm

## Certificates and documents

 MC330 is quoted per order for your finish, packaging and quantity. Samples are quoted separately.

 The published FCC record for MC330 is FCC ID 2A8ZP-MC330: two KL-Certification GmbH TCB grants dated 13 June 2024 for Part 15C DSS+DTS, 2402–2480 MHz, held by Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics. The published Japan radio certificate is Giteki R 219-248097 (MIC RCB 219), a type-based certificate that names MC330 among nine models.

 The published CE-RED, UKCA and RoHS records are LCS lab attestations, not certifications. MC220 was the physical test article; the other listed models rely on a sameness declaration. See the OEM / ODM process and shipping guidance when planning the project.

 The battery cell supplier's own certificates, test reports and other supplier documents — covering the cell, not the assembled MC330 — are published on Battery-cell documents supplied with the MC330 files. They confirm an 18500 1500mAh cell family; the cell used in your build is stated on your quotation.

 Tell us the quantity, destination and customisation level for an all-in sample quotation covering goods and shipping. A sample-fee credit may be agreed for a later large order; eligibility and amount are set in the quotation.

 Quote MC330 on WhatsApp Build an enquiry for MC330

 Notes

 Quotation review: 13 September 2026. Indicative USD product prices depend on the selected model, configuration and quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and current price validity are confirmed on quotation.

 Confirm the selected build and runtime requirements on the quotation. Orders can use the factory as seller of record or an arrangement coordinated by RyanFulfil. The quotation confirms the seller and invoice issuer.

 Runtime and recharge figures are factory estimates with no test conditions supplied. Confirm playback volume, selected sound, clock brightness, wireless source and battery condition before measuring the ordered build, and agree a runtime test method before setting an acceptance threshold for either model.

 The lab attestations do not establish that every model has been independently tested, so confirm the document scope, named model, selected build and destination-market requirements on the quotation.

 Check the sample’s 30, 60 and 90 minute timer settings alongside clock brightness and control visibility in the room where buyers will use it.

## Sample checks

 Record MC330, the selected finish, sound library and packaging version on the sample approval and quotation.

 Listen through the selected sound library, check the count and agree written commercial-use rights for any supplied or customised audio.

 Require the timer controls to show and operate at 30, 60 and 90 minutes.

 Check clock brightness, button visibility and Bluetooth pairing on the supplied sample. Confirm its charging connector, compatible cable and adapter; do not infer charging-protocol support from appearance.

 Require the quoted unit to match the stated 1500 mAh battery, Φ52 mm 4 Ω 3 W speaker and 142 × 89 × 161 mm dimensions, or document any agreed variance.

 Set the local-playback, Bluetooth-playback and recharge test conditions before accepting the stated runtime figures.

 Require the quotation to identify the exact seller, invoice issuer and destination-market document scope for the ordered build.

========================================================================
# Camping & Magnetic Work Light Manufacturer | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/camping-work-lights/
Summary: TD-CL04 clip-on and TD-CL05 folding motion-sensor work lights from TUODI: rechargeable, magnetic and IPX6-marked, with flood, spot, red and blue modes.

Home › Camping & Work Lights

## Camping & Work Lights — rechargeable, magnetic, IPX6-marked

A deliberately short outdoor range: two compact rechargeable lights with magnetic hands-free mounting, built on one LED and battery platform (flood, spot, red and blue modes), so mixed orders across the pair are straightforward. The Camping & Home Light Bar (TDL-6113) below extends them for tent and area lighting.

 About the IPX6 marking. IP ratings on these models are the factory's own markings: IPX6 on these models is a manufacturer's declaration, not a third-party test. The CE file for the camping range covers electromagnetic compliance only, not water resistance. The X means the dust digit was never rated. Read every IP number here the same way: without a named test report beside it, it is a manufacturer's marking, not a tested rating. If your buyers will use these in genuinely wet conditions, ask us before you order.

![TUODI TD-CL04 clip-on tactical light, black aluminium housing](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/td-cl04-black.jpg)

![TD-CL04 photographed in heavy rain — the factory’s own illustration of its IPX6 marking](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/cl04-ipx6-rain.jpg)

![TUODI TD-CL04 clip-on tactical light, orange](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/td-cl04-orange.jpg)

 TD-CL04 / LX-CL04

## Clip-On Magnetic EDC Light — TD-CL04 / LX-CL04

 A 60-gram aluminium EDC pocket light that clips to a cap brim, backpack strap or shoulder strap, sticks to steel by magnet, or hangs by its keyring — for camping, hiking, night walking, search and repair work.

 Light modes | Flood 3.3 W / 350 lm / 7000 K · Spot 3.7 W / 290 lm / 6000 K · Red 2 W / 40 lm (620 nm) · Blue 1.1 W / 20 lm (460 nm)

 Battery | 600 mAh rechargeable, 5 V / 500 mA charging

 Water resistance | IPX6 — manufacturer’s declaration, not third-party tested

 Colour rendering | CRI 70

 Size / weight | 64 × 29 × 26 mm · 60 g including battery

 Body | Aluminium alloy — black, green, orange

 Low-brightness runtime | Approximately 13 hours in spot-low mode or 15 hours in flood-low mode — factory figures. Runtime varies with mode, brightness and battery condition.

 Quoted per order for the selected configuration.

 Ask about TD-CL04

![TUODI TD-CL05 folding motion sensor work light, green](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/td-cl05.jpg)

![TD-CL05 lighting an engine bay and a tent at night](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/td-cl05-camping.jpg)

 TD-CL05

## Motion-Sensor Folding Work Light

 A COB work light with a folding stand, magnetic base and a PIR motion sensor — hang it in a tent and it lights up when someone moves; stick it under a bonnet for hands-free repairs.

 Light modes | Flood 3.3 W / 350 lm · Spot 3.7 W / 290 lm · Red 2 W / 40 lm · Blue 1.1 W / 20 lm

 Motion sensor | PIR, 3 m sensing distance, 30 s hold time

 Battery | 600 mAh rechargeable, 5 V / 500 mA charging

 Water resistance | IPX6 — manufacturer’s declaration, not third-party tested

 Size / weight | 125 × 50 × 35 mm · 182 g including battery

 Body | ABS with folding stand and magnetic mount

 Quoted per order for the selected configuration.

 Ask about TD-CL05

![TUODI TDL-6113 multifunctional sensor light bar hanging in a tent](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6113-hero.jpg)

![TDL-6113 rechargeable sensor light bar](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6113-render-1.jpg)

 TDL-6113

## TDL-6113 — Rechargeable Camping & Home Light Bar

 The crossover bar in the range: hangs in a tent by its hook, sticks to steel by magnet, and works as a sensor light at home the rest of the year. Typical uses: home lighting, power-cut standby, barbecues, tent camping, a portable safety light, car repair.

 Battery | 3000 mAh polymer, 5 V charging; standby draw <80 µA

 Brightness steps | up to 400 lm — 1 W / 1.8 W / 2.4 W three-step slide

 Sensing | PIR >5 m, 140° angle, 30 s hold (2026 factory spec); OFF / ON / AUTO modes

 LEDs | 102 × 2835 emitters, rated over 80,000 hours; white or warm white, specified per order

 Working temperature | −10 °C to +50 °C

 Size / weight | 430 × 37 × 16 mm · 229 g (±5 g)

 Quoted per order for the selected configuration.

 Ask about TDL-6113

 Documents that name these models. TD-CL04 and TD-CL05 are named, with LX-CL02 to LX-CL06, on three 2026 Shenzhen DL Testing certificates, each shown with its test report: EMC DLE-260320010C with report DLE-260320010R, UKCA-EMC DLE-260320009C with report DLE-260320009R, and FCC Part 15B DLE-260320011C with report DLE-260320011R. None of them tests water resistance. Registered designs: EU 015119914-0001 (hand lamps), UK 6479363 (pocket torches) and 6479362 (hand lamps), and Chinese design patents ZL 2025 3 0586531.2 (LX-CL04) and ZL 2025 3 0572189.0 (LX-CL05). TDL-6113 is named on EMC document DLE-260814001C and RoHS test report DLR-260814022R.

 Customisation. Housing colours, logo printing, packaging and blister/giftbox options are available on all models. Also in the outdoor range: TDL-6118 magnetic camping light with light-control and the TDL-7124 camping crossover — tell us your use case on WhatsApp and the team will recommend from the current catalogue.

 Related: what drives the price rechargeable sensor light manufacturer OEM camping lights buyer FAQ

 Notes

 Quotation review: 13 September 2026. Indicative USD product prices depend on the selected model, configuration and quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and current price validity are confirmed on quotation.

 Runtime figures are factory figures; confirm them on your sample.

========================================================================
# Wholesale Motion Sensor Cabinet Lights | TUODI, China
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/sensor-cabinet-lights/
Summary: Wholesale rechargeable PIR, radar, hand-wave and removable-battery cabinet lights, China. TDL-6110X from US$4.91 a unit at 100–500 units (12, 23 or 60 cm).

Home › Sensor Cabinet Lights

## Rechargeable Motion Sensor Cabinet Lights from China — PIR, radar & hand-wave

Rechargeable light bars for kitchen cabinets, wardrobes and displays from TUODI, whose current production base is in Zhaoqing, China. The Sensor Cabinet Light Series (TDL-6110) comes in PIR, microwave radar, hand-wave/touch and remote-control versions; the Detachable-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6111) adds a removable battery card. TDL-6110X starts at US$4.91 a unit at 100–500 units (indicative wholesale, 12, 23 or 60 cm).

## The cabinet-light range

![TDL-6110X rechargeable sensor cabinet light, product render](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-render-1.jpg)

## TDL-6110X PIR
Everyday wardrobe and cabinet lighting; five lengths.
US$4.91–13.05 a unit at 100–500 units (12, 23 or 60 cm)
Ask about TDL-6110X

![TDL-6110XWB shown at its three selectable colour temperatures, warm through cool](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110wb-cct.jpg)

## TDL-6110XWB radar
Microwave radar sensing, generally less affected by room temperature than PIR.
US$7.94–13.57 a unit at 100–500 units
Ask about TDL-6110XWB

![TDL-6110X-IR hand-wave and touch control sensor light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-ir.jpg)

## TDL-6110X-IR hand-wave
Hand-wave and touch control for displays and work surfaces.
US$4.91–13.05 a unit at 100–500 units (12, 23, 40 or 60 cm)
Ask about TDL-6110X-IR

![Detachable-battery TDL-6111 sensor light bars illuminated together on a production workbench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-production-check.jpg)

## TDL-6111 detachable battery
Charge the battery card and leave the light bar installed.
Ask about TDL-6111

![TDL-6110XRF-DJ light bar, 9 mm slim aluminium profile](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110xrf-dj-remote-2.jpg)

## TDL-6110XRF-DJ remote
Spliceable bars switched together from one remote.
Ask about TDL-6110XRF-DJ

![TDL-6108A sensor light in bathroom, stairs, drawer and entry applications](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6108a-apps.jpg)

## TDL-6108A big battery
A compact 380 mm unit with a quoted 4000 mAh battery.
US$9.14 a unit, minimum 1,000 units
Ask about TDL-6108A

![TUODI TDL-7127 twin-head battery PIR safe light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-7127-neutral.jpg)

## TDL-7127 safe light
Twin-head battery PIR light for safes, strongboxes and deep wardrobes.
US$4.66 a white-shell unit, minimum 1,000 units
Ask about TDL-7127

![TDL-7134 wireless picture light with remote, spec card and mounting hardware](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-7134-kit.jpg)

## TDL-7134 picture light
Battery spotlight for artwork and display walls, with a dimming remote.
US$8.87 a unit at 100–500 units
Ask about TDL-7134

 Every light above runs on its own battery. For a permanent supply, the factory also builds the Supply-Powered Cabinet Light Bar (TDL-7148), with 5 V or 24 V builds published; see it in the Product Finder. For a furniture programme, use the wardrobe and closet planning guide.

 Get a cabinet-light quote on WhatsApp Build a cabinet-light enquiry

## Full specifications by model

![TUODI sensor light applications: kitchen, stairs, wardrobe, drawer, bookshelf, bedroom](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/cabinet-applications.jpg)

![TDL-6110X exploded diagram: PC lampshade, LED beads, PIR sensor, USB charging port](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-diagram.jpg)

## TDL-6110X — Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light

 TDL-6110X model page: lengths, factory figures and buyer summary →

 A rechargeable PIR bar for cabinets, wardrobes, bedside areas, storage spaces, desks, corridors and stairs. Painted magnets on the back and a 3M-pad option support tool-free mounting on a suitable surface.

 PIR motion detection, 120° angle, >3 m on the 30 / 40 cm models

 Battery sized to the length — 300 to 4400 mAh across the five lengths (see the table below)

 LED count scales with length (102 on the 30 cm bar)

 Selectable 2800 / 4000 / 6000 K on the 30 / 40 cm models; brightness adjustable

 USB-C charging; magnet + 3M installation

 Five factory lengths, plus custom lengths. A length outside the table is quoted as a custom build, cut on the factory's own cutting equipment from an existing aluminium profile, as a tooling job with its own minimum order. A 50 cm bar, for example, comes from the 60 cm profile and is offered at 250 or 300 lm with a 3000 or 4500 mAh pack, with planning figures of 5–7 days for the sample and 25–30 days for production. Ask for those same three answers on the length you need.

 12 cm | 118 × 38 × 9 mm · 300 mAh · 90 g · carton 200 pcs

 23 cm | 231 × 38 × 9 mm · 1500 mAh · 150 g · carton 100 pcs

 30 cm new · quoted per order | 300 × 38 × 9 mm · 2200 mAh · 0.6–3 W ±10% · 50–180 lm ±10% · 102 LEDs · 171 g · 18 s hold · carton 60 pcs, 335 × 335 × 290 mm, 15 / 14.5 kg gross / net

 40 cm · quoted per order | 403 × 38 × 9 mm · 3000 mAh · 3 W · 220 lm · 140 LEDs · 210 g · 18 s hold · carton 48 pcs, 425 × 270 × 300 mm, 14.5 / 14 kg gross / net

 60 cm | 598 × 38 × 9 mm · 4400 mAh · 320 g · carton 40 pcs

 Private-label sample starting points: Enquire about 30 cm · Enquire about 40 cm

 Need another length or a custom build? Ask about the TDL-6110 family.

 30 and 40 cm: the private-label fit. Silver aluminium housing, rechargeable lithium battery, USB-C, PIR with night-only and all-day modes, magnetic mounting with two adhesive steel plates, three colour temperatures and a charging indicator. The two adhesive steel plates measure 3.5 × 4 cm, and the quoted bar magnets are single-sided N40 grade with a recommended maximum load of 300 g. The quoted CRI is ≥80. Stock samples, logo application and a custom retail box are available. Price, customisation minimums and lead time come with the quotation. Published prices include delivery within China; another basis such as FOB can be quoted on request.

 The factory specifies 5–6 hours to charge and 20 hours of runtime at minimum brightness, and offers a one-year warranty; the DOA definition, return freight and remedy go on your proforma invoice.

 Variants on the same platform: TDL-6110XD / 6110XS / 6110X-C housings, hand-sweep (IR) versions in four lengths: 12, 23, 40 and 60 cm (their own battery set: 300 / 900 / 1500 / 2200 mAh), TDL-6110H with daylight inhibit, TDL-6110X-RF with RF remote, and TDL-6110X-TD touch-control (38 cm 3000 mAh / 58 cm 4500 mAh, 4 h charge → 8 h runtime).

 Indicative wholesale for TDL-6110X PIR (12, 23 or 60 cm) and TDL-6110X-IR hand-sweep (12, 23, 40 or 60 cm) only: US$4.91–13.05 / unit · 100–500 units. PIR 30 / 40 cm builds, other housings, custom lengths, TDL-6110H, TDL-6110X-RF and TDL-6110X-TD are quoted separately and excluded from this range. TDL-6110X-TD 38 / 58 cm requires a minimum of 1,000 units.

 Ask about the TDL-6110 family

## TDL-6110XWB — Microwave Radar Sensor Light

 Same form factor with microwave radar instead of PIR. Radar is generally less affected by room temperature than PIR and can sense through some thin panels; tell us the panel material and sensor position in your cabinet. Three lengths (2026 factory quotation sheet):

 24 cm | 1 W · 74 lm · 88 LEDs · 1500 mAh

 38 cm | 2.3 W · 205 lm · 140 LEDs · 3000 mAh

 58 cm | 2.9 W · 225 lm · 218 LEDs · 4500 mAh

 Radar detection <3 m, 150° beam; 15 s hold; 10 lux daylight threshold

 Colour temperature 2800–5500 K (quotation sheet); 3.7 V platform

 Runtime with its test basis: 20 h continuous at minimum brightness — about 2 months at up to 15 activations a day (2026 factory listing basis)

 Indicative wholesale: US$7.94–13.57 / unit · 100–500 units

 Ask about TDL-6110XWB

## TDL-6110X-IR — Hand-Wave & Touch Control

 TDL-6110X-IR model page: controls, lengths and buyer summary →

 For displays and work surfaces where motion sensing would false-trigger: wave a hand to switch, touch to cycle colour, long-press to dim. Settings are retained by a memory function.

 Hand-wave IR sensor + touch sensor; AUTO (90 s) and ON modes

 Three colour temperatures — cool, neutral, warm white — with brightness memory

 Battery sized to the length — 300 to 2200 mAh across the hand-sweep lengths; USB charging

 Magnetic quick-mount, no screws or brackets

 Ask about TDL-6110X-IR

![TDL-6111 removable-card design illustration](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-battery.jpg)
 Illustration of the removable-card design. Confirm the battery capacity for the selected build on the quotation.

## TDL-6111 — Detachable-Battery Sensor Light

 TDL-6111 model page: configured spans, packing and buyer summary →

 For cabinets, wardrobes, bedside areas and storage spaces where charging access matters, charge the detachable battery card while the installed light bar stays in place.

 Two configured spans, with their published factory specifications:

 35 cm configured span
25 cm light section + 10 cm battery card

Power
 1.3 W
 Power tolerance
 ±10%
 Light output
 136 lm

Configuration reference: tdl-6111-35cm@3.

Enquire about 35 cm configured span

54 cm configured span
40 cm light section + 14 cm battery card

Battery capacity
 3000 mAh
 Power
 2 W
 Power tolerance
 ±10%
 Light output
 208 lm
 LED count
 146 LEDs
 Hold time
 15 s

Configuration reference: tdl-6111-54cm@3.

Enquire about 54 cm configured span
EMC lab attestation DLE-260814001C
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; issued 17 August 2026.
Named subjects: TDL-6110X, 6110X-IR, 6110XRF-DJ, 6110XWB, 6111, 6112, 6113, 6118, 6108.
Family named; selected build still needs matching.
This EMC document is listed for the named model families; ask for the full document to check the length and battery build in your quotation.
Coverage of either selected TDL-6111 configuration still needs matching to the full document.
Do not use this EMC document to confirm battery capacity, runtime, water resistance, electrical safety or battery transport acceptance.
Request the full document and underlying test reports.
Ask whether the document covers the exact build in your quotation.
Request only: Full document and underlying test reports.
View the published document preview

 Detachable-battery bars under test on the factory bench, August 2026.

![Neutral kraft LED sensor-light boxes packed inside a master carton](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-neutral-carton.jpg)

 Neutral-box packing at the factory. Retail artwork, labels and barcodes are specified per order.

## TDL-6108A — Big-Battery Rechargeable Sensor Light

 A compact 380 mm unit with a quoted 4000 mAh battery, 170 lm and CRI above 80. How often it needs charging depends on brightness, triggers per day and hold time.

 170 lm, CRI >80, white or warm white; 2.1 W (2026 factory spec)

 4000 mAh rechargeable battery; ON / OFF / AUTO slide switch

 PIR detection >3 m / 120°; off 18 s (±2 s) after you leave

 Built-in daylight sensor; screw, 3M tape or magnet installation

 Indicative wholesale: US$9.14 / unit · minimum 1,000 units

 Ask about TDL-6108A

![Remote cabinet-light installation illustration](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110xrf-install.jpg)
 Installation illustration.

## TDL-6110XRF-DJ — Spliceable Remote-Control Light

 TDL-6110XRF-DJ model page: bar, remote and buyer summary →

 Plan a group of light bars around the separate TDL-2041-DJ remote. The factory recommends six or fewer bars per remote for best results.

 Modular splicing: choose the bar count for your layout

 PIR placement guide: 3 m / 90°; the paired remote uses 2 × AAA, not included

 Strong-magnet mounting — no tools

 Synchronised switching across all connected bars; 2.4 GHz link, 15 m receive range

 One TDL-2041-DJ remote controls a whole run of bars — best within six bars per remote (2026 factory guidance)

 Per bar: 1.4 W, 120 lm, CRI 80, 1500 mAh, 250 × 40 × 9 mm

 Quoted per order for the selected bar and remote configuration

 Ask about TDL-6110XRF-DJ

## TDL-7134 — Wireless Picture & Display Light

 Battery-powered spotlight for artwork and display walls — no wiring, installed in minutes, with a remote for dimming and auto-off timers.

 120 lm, 3000 K warm white, CRI above 85 for true colours

 Remote with dimmer (30 / 50 / 100%) and timer (15 min – 5 h); brightness memory

 Multi-direction rotating head with even-distribution lens

 Runs on 4 × C (LR14) batteries; the instruction card says batteries are not included

 Indicative wholesale: US$8.87 / unit · 100–500 units

 Ask about TDL-7134

![TDL-7120 battery powered motion sensor light bars](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-7120.jpg)

## TDL-7120 — AAA-Battery Sensor Light Bar

 The economical wireless option: powered by 4 × AAA batteries, attaching and detaching from a magnetic strip for quick battery changes. A built-in daylight sensor keeps it off when the room is already lit.

 PIR motion activation; daylight sensor extends battery life

 Magnetic-strip mounting with adhesive backing — peel and stick

 Related battery models: TDL-7125A puck lights and the TDL-7126B-A 14-inch panel (180 lm, 4 × AA)

 Quantity-tiered pricing, quoted per order

 Ask about TDL-7120

## TDL-7127 — Twin-Head Safe & Strongbox Light

 A battery PIR light the factory catalogues specifically as a safe light (保险柜灯): two independently aimed heads that light the interior of a safe, strongbox or deep wardrobe the moment it opens. White or silver housings.

 Sensing | PIR, >3 m, 140° cone, 15 s delay

 Brightness steps | 50 lm (0.9 W) · 36 lm (0.6 W) · 24 lm (0.4 W)

 Power | 4.5 V — 3 × AAA batteries

 Light colour | White or warm white (selectable)

 Size / weight | 117 × 75 × 33 mm · 84 g

 Carton | 54 pcs · 12 kg gross · 490 × 265 × 410 mm

 Indicative wholesale: US$4.66 / white-shell unit; silver shell quoted per order · minimum 1,000 units

 Ask about TDL-7127

![TDL-8192 detachable light tube on a nightstand](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-8192.jpg)

![TDL-8193 ambient light bar shown lit, with its gaming, party, reading and sleep scene modes](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-8193.jpg)

## Detachable Light Tubes & Ambient Bars

 The bedroom-and-desk end of the family: a light tube that lifts off its base to become a hand-held lamp (TDL-8192), and an ambient bar for gaming, party, reading and sleep scenes (TDL-8193).

 TDL-8192 — detachable tube for a nightstand; base charging

 TDL-8193 — scene modes for gaming, party, reading and sleeping; TV backlight or desk placement

 TDL-8192 is rechargeable; TDL-8193 5 V / 12 V powered builds are quoted separately

 Indicative wholesale for TDL-8192 only: US$20.50 / unit · minimum 1,000 units. TDL-8193B-5V and TDL-8193B-12V are quoted separately.

 Ask about the ambient series

![TDL-7125A motion sensor puck lights in bathroom, kitchen, bedroom and closet applications](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-7125a-apps.jpg)

## TDL-7125A — Sensor Puck Lights

 Round battery-powered puck lights for bathrooms, bedside tables, kitchens and closets — stick-anywhere formats that complete a whole-home wireless lighting range for distributors.

 PIR motion activation with daylight sensing

 Battery powered, tool-free adhesive or magnetic mounting

 Interlinked-sensing versions available: one sensor triggers a chain of wall and footlights via 2.4G wireless — ideal for corridors and staircases

 Ask about pucks & wall lights

## More models in the family

 TDL-6103 (CE and RoHS certified per its factory sheet, CRI 75), TDL-6107 night-light/desk-lamp hybrid with a four-position switch (OFF / ON / night-only auto / all-day auto), TDL-6106 and 6116 bars, hand-sweep 5V plug-in ultra-thin bars, split battery-pack versions, and low-voltage silicone LED strips (2–3 m, tri-colour). The ultra-thin magnetic models are the factory's best sellers. Ask for the full catalogue with current specifications on WhatsApp.

## Questions buyers ask about the cabinet-light range

 What lengths does the TDL-6110X PIR cabinet light bar come in, and how does battery size change across them?

 The TDL-6110X comes in five factory lengths, with the battery sized to the length: 12 cm (300 mAh), 23 cm (1,500 mAh), 30 cm (2,200 mAh), 40 cm (3,000 mAh) and 60 cm (4,400 mAh). LED count scales with length too: the 30 cm bar runs 102 LEDs at 50-180 lm, the 40 cm runs 140 LEDs at 220 lm, and those two lengths are the private-label fit. Confirm your length, LED count and output on the quotation and sample.

 Can I order a cabinet light bar in a length that isn't on your standard size chart, like 50 cm?

 Yes. Off-chart lengths are made as a custom build: the factory cuts an existing aluminium profile on its own equipment, a tooling job with its own minimum order. The 50 cm bar, for example, comes from the 60 cm profile at 250 or 300 lm with a 3,000 or 4,500 mAh pack, on planning figures of 5-7 days for the sample and 25-30 days for production. Documents for a listed length do not automatically cover a custom build. Before ordering for the EU, ask us to check how the manufacturer's conformity assessment, technical documentation and EU declaration of conformity cover the exact build; confirm any RoHS or FCC evidence separately.

 How long does the TDL-6110X stay lit after it stops sensing motion?

 The quoted 30 cm and 40 cm builds use an 18-second hold: the bar stays lit for 18 seconds after motion stops, then switches off. Hold time drives both perceived convenience and battery drain, so test the PIR field and the hold time together on your sample. Ask for the hold figure in writing on the exact length and build you order, since it is not listed for every length in the family.

 How strong is the magnetic mount on the TDL-6110X — will it stay on my cabinet without extra hardware?

 On the 30 and 40 cm bars — the private-label fit — the bar mounts magnetically onto two adhesive steel plates measuring 3.5 x 4 cm; the quoted magnets are single-sided N40 grade with a recommended maximum load of 300 g. The 300 g figure does not say per plate or per bar, or pull-off versus shear, so test both on your own cabinet finish and door before you commit.

 What's the difference between the PIR TDL-6110X and the radar TDL-6110XWB, and when should I choose radar?

 The PIR TDL-6110X senses moving body heat over a 120-degree angle, rated beyond 3 m on the 30 and 40 cm models. The radar TDL-6110XWB uses microwave sensing instead: under 3 m, a wider 150-degree beam, and generally less affected by room temperature than PIR. It may sense through some thin panels, so a closed wardrobe door may not stop detection. Prove placement and through-panel behaviour on your own cabinet rather than assuming the door will either block or pass the signal.

 Notes

 Quotation review: 13 September 2026. Indicative USD product prices depend on the selected model, configuration and quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and current price validity are confirmed on quotation.

 Points to settle on the sample: for TDL-6110X, length, mounting, colour setting and the intended sensing behaviour; for TDL-6110XWB radar, panel material, sensor position and through-panel behaviour in the actual cabinet; for TDL-6110X-IR, hand-wave and touch behaviour in the intended position; for TDL-6110XRF-DJ, bar count, layout, pairing and recovery after power loss.

 Do not infer a fixed wired installation from the appearance of a light bar; define the power architecture in the RFQ and test the proposed build. For TDL-7148, confirm the exact supply, length, mounting and control on your quotation and sample.

 TDL-6110X 30 and 40 cm: the 30 and 40 cm rows carry the newer model-specific sheet; the others use the 2026 family sheet. Name the exact length on your quotation and sample, confirm stepped or stepless dimming, and test the supplied mounting parts and sensing field in your intended position. Test pull-off and shear of the magnetic mount on your own cabinet finish before you commit. Check charging time, runtime and CRI on your sample if they matter to you. CE, RoHS and FCC coverage for these exact lengths is confirmed only when we send you the issued document.

 Specify the battery for your private-label order: agree cell chemistry, rated capacity, pack dimensions, protection, charging input, use-while-charging and the UN 38.3/MSDS mapping on the quotation and sample. The capacities above are the factory's figures; if capacity is commercially critical, agree a charge/discharge check and its pass limit.

 TDL-6110XWB: for the 58 cm build, use 225 lm when planning; an alternative 255 lm figure also appears and is unconfirmed, so agree the output for your selected sample before ordering. The artwork labels the cool end of the colour-temperature range differently from the quotation sheet; confirm it with us if it matters.

 TDL-6110XRF-DJ: confirm joining, pairing and control behaviour and the sensing field for the selected layout. The installation illustration is a guide; confirm the quoted power and connection arrangement and use an approved drawing. Agree brightness and daily use, then measure runtime on the selected sample.

 TDL-7134: the instruction card says batteries are not included, so budget for them; battery inclusion is confirmed in writing with your quotation. The factory-quoted battery life of around 160 days has no defined use pattern behind it, so treat it as indicative.

 TDL-6111: confirm the clearance needed to remove the card. Days per charge depend on use; agree the runtime test conditions on your quotation, and confirm whether unit and carton weights are net or gross.

 TDL-6111, 35 cm configured span: Factory specification: 25 cm light section plus 10 cm battery card. Please confirm the selected build on the quotation.

Battery capacity
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 LED count
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Hold time
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Sensing pack
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Charging connector
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Colour temperature
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Battery cell
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Factory build reference
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Runtime under agreed use conditions
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Separate replacement-card supply
 To be confirmed on your quotation.

Please confirm battery capacity on your quotation.
Please confirm led count on your quotation.
Please confirm hold time on your quotation.
Please confirm sensing pack on your quotation.
Please confirm charging connector on your quotation.
Please confirm colour temperature on your quotation.
Please confirm battery cell on your quotation.
Please confirm factory build reference on your quotation.
Please state runtime under agreed use conditions.
Confirm replacement-card availability, compatibility and order terms for the selected configuration.
Confirm on the quotation whether unit and carton weights are net or gross.

TDL-6111, 54 cm configured span: Factory specification: 40 cm light section plus 14 cm battery card. Please confirm the selected build on the quotation.

Sensing pack
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Charging connector
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Colour temperature
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Battery cell
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Factory build reference
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Runtime under agreed use conditions
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Separate replacement-card supply
 To be confirmed on your quotation.

Please confirm sensing pack on your quotation.
Please confirm charging connector on your quotation.
Please confirm colour temperature on your quotation.
Please confirm battery cell on your quotation.
Please confirm factory build reference on your quotation.
Please state runtime under agreed use conditions.
Confirm replacement-card availability, compatibility and order terms for the selected configuration.
Confirm on the quotation whether unit and carton weights are net or gross.

 Related: rechargeable-light RFQ questions serviceable sensor-lighting design sample-to-scale ordering what drives the price why TUODI costs more PIR sensor switch manufacturer night light manufacturer OEM sensor lighting buyer FAQ

========================================================================
# TDL-6110X Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/tdl-6110x-rechargeable-pir-cabinet-light/
Summary: TDL-6110X rechargeable PIR cabinet light from TUODI's Zhaoqing factory: length-specific output and batteries, magnetic mounting and OEM samples.

Home > Cabinet lights > TDL-6110X

## TDL-6110X Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light

A rechargeable PIR light bar for kitchen cabinets and wardrobes, with USB-C charging and tool-free magnetic mounting. The 30 cm and 40 cm builds are the private-label starting points.

Indicative wholesale US$4.91–13.05 a unit at 100–500 units for the 12, 23 and 60 cm builds. The 30 cm and 40 cm builds are quoted per order.

PIR >3 m / 120°
USB-C charging
2800 / 4000 / 6000 K
Magnet + adhesive steel plates
Five lengths, 12 to 60 cm

Quote TDL-6110X on WhatsAppBuild an enquiry for TDL-6110XDownload buyer summary

![TDL-6110X rechargeable PIR cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-render-1.jpg)
![TUODI sensor light applications: kitchen, stairs, wardrobe, drawer, bookshelf, bedroom](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/cabinet-applications.jpg)
![TUODI rechargeable sensor light illuminating a shelf](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110-shelf.jpg)

On this pageBest forLengths and specificationsMounting and custom lengthsCertificates and test reportsNotes

## Best for
Cabinets, wardrobes, bedside areas, storage spaces, desks, corridors and stairs: anywhere a rechargeable bar should light up when someone moves nearby. Start with the 30 cm or 40 cm build for a private-label sample.

## Lengths and specifications
The 30 cm build is 300 × 38 × 9 mm, 2200 mAh, 0.6–3 W ±10%, 50–180 lm ±10%, with 102 LEDs and an 18-second hold. The 40 cm build is 403 × 38 × 9 mm, 3000 mAh, 3 W, 220 lm, with 140 LEDs and an 18-second hold.
The factory sheet for both builds lists PIR detection above 3 m at 120°, USB-C charging, 2800 / 4000 / 6000 K selection, a silver aluminium housing, ON, night-only AUTO1 and all-day AUTO2 modes, with two adhesive iron plates and a USB-C cable in the box. Factory figures for these builds: 5–6 hours to charge, 20 hours of runtime at minimum brightness and CRI ≥80, with a one-year factory warranty whose DOA definition, return freight and remedy are set on your proforma invoice.
CE-EMC certificate DLE-260814001C (valid only together with test report DLE-260814001R) and RoHS test report DLR-260814022R name the 23, 40 and 60 cm builds. The 12 cm and 30 cm builds are not named, and neither is any custom length. The same documents also name 80 and 90 cm builds, which are not among the five lengths listed here.
TDL-6110X — Lengths and specificationsLength | Details | Enquiry
12 cm | 118 × 38 × 9 mm; 300 mAh. Price: in the indicative US$4.91–13.05 a unit range at 100–500 units. Documents: not named on CE-EMC DLE-260814001C or RoHS test report DLR-260814022R |
23 cm | 231 × 38 × 9 mm; 1500 mAh; 1.4 W; 110 lm; 74 LEDs. Price: in the indicative US$4.91–13.05 a unit range at 100–500 units. Documents: named on CE-EMC DLE-260814001C and RoHS test report DLR-260814022R |
30 cm | 300 × 38 × 9 mm; 2200 mAh; 0.6–3 W ±10%; 50–180 lm ±10%; 102 LEDs; 18 s hold. Price: quoted per order. Documents: not named on CE-EMC DLE-260814001C or RoHS test report DLR-260814022R | Enquire about 30 cm
40 cm | 403 × 38 × 9 mm; 3000 mAh; 3 W; 220 lm; 140 LEDs; 18 s hold. Price: quoted per order. Documents: named on CE-EMC DLE-260814001C and RoHS test report DLR-260814022R | Enquire about 40 cm
60 cm | 598 × 38 × 9 mm; 4400 mAh; 3.2 W; 280 lm; 216 LEDs. Price: in the indicative US$4.91–13.05 a unit range at 100–500 units. Documents: named on CE-EMC DLE-260814001C and RoHS test report DLR-260814022R |

![TDL-6110X exploded diagram: PC lampshade, LED beads, PIR sensor, USB charging port](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-diagram.jpg)

## Mounting and custom lengths
On the 30 and 40 cm builds, the bar mounts magnetically on two 3.5 × 4 cm adhesive steel plates; the quoted bar magnets are single-sided N40 grade with a recommended maximum load of 300 g.
Lengths outside the table are made as custom builds, cut from an existing aluminium profile as a tooling job with its own minimum order. A 50 cm bar comes from the 60 cm profile and is offered at 250 or 300 lm with a 3000 or 4500 mAh pack, with planning figures of 5–7 days for the sample and 25–30 days for production; ask for those same three answers on the length you need.

## Certificates and test reports
EMC lab attestation DLE-260814001C and RoHS test report DLR-260814022R name the TDL-6110X family.

## Related cabinet lights
![TDL-6110X-IR hand-wave and touch cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-ir.jpg)
TDL-6110X-IR
![TDL-6111 detachable battery sensor-light format](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-battery.jpg)
TDL-6111
![TDL-6110XRF-DJ 9 mm slim remote-control light bar](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110xrf-dj-remote-2.jpg)
TDL-6110XRF-DJ

Quote TDL-6110X on WhatsApp Build an enquiry for TDL-6110X Compare the cabinet-light family What moves the price Download buyer summary

Notes

Quotation review: 13 September 2026. Indicative USD product prices depend on the selected model, configuration and quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and current price validity are confirmed on quotation.

## Sample acceptance checklist
Confirm the selected configuration on your quotation.
The documents above name the model family. Match the full document to the selected build and destination before ordering.
Measure charge time, runtime and CRI on the sample when they matter to the buying decision.
Use the PIR option for normal cabinet or wardrobe movement, then place a sample where the intended user enters the sensing field. Actual surface finish, clearance and charging access should be tested in the furniture rather than inferred from a product render; treat the 300 g load figure as a sample check on the intended finish.
The platform includes several lengths, and their figures are not interchangeable. Name the full model and length in the enquiry, sample record and proforma invoice.
Confirm whether the selected build uses fixed brightness levels or stepless long-press dimming, and whether its indicator shows charging only or remaining battery charge. Confirm hold time and colour-temperature setting on the sample for the selected length.
Request exact-model CE, RoHS and FCC documents if needed for your market. Put battery chemistry, rated capacity, protection, charging input, UN38.3/MSDS mapping, warranty remedy and the selected colour setting on the quotation and sample record.
Confirm selected length and output
Test PIR field and the selected hold time; 30 cm and 40 cm builds are stated as 18 seconds
Confirm stepped or stepless dimming and charge-indicator meaning
Match battery and compliance documents to the quoted build
Test pull-off and shear of the magnetic mount on your cabinet finish against the factory's 300 g recommended load

========================================================================
# TDL-6111 Removable-Battery Wardrobe Light | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/tdl-6111-detachable-battery-sensor-light/
Summary: TDL-6111 removable-battery cabinet light for furniture makers: charge the battery card and leave the bar installed. Two configured spans, from TUODI.

Home > Cabinet lights > TDL-6111

## TDL-6111 Detachable-Battery Sensor Light

A sensor light bar with a detachable battery card: charge the card and leave the light bar installed. It suits wardrobe and serviced-furniture layouts where charging the card is easier than removing the fitted light bar.

Detachable battery card
Magnetic mounting with adhesive steel plates
Long-press dimming
Two configured spans

Quote TDL-6111 on WhatsAppBuild an enquiry for TDL-6111Download buyer summary

![TDL-6111 detachable battery sensor-light format](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-battery.jpg)
Illustration of the removable-card design. Confirm the battery capacity for the selected build on the quotation.
![Detachable-battery TDL-6111 sensor light bars illuminated together on a production workbench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-production-check.jpg)
Detachable-battery bars under test on the factory bench, August 2026.
![TDL-6111 sensor light bar mounted over a wardrobe hanging rail](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-rail.jpg)
![Neutral kraft LED sensor-light boxes packed inside a master carton](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-neutral-carton.jpg)
Neutral-box packing at the factory. Retail artwork, labels and barcodes are specified per order.

On this pageBest forConfigured spansCharging and service accessCertificates and test reportsNotes

## Best for
Wardrobe rails, cabinets and rental or serviced furniture. Each configured span combines a light section with a detachable battery card; it is not one continuous housing.

## Configured spans and specifications

TDL-6111 — configured spansField | 35 cm configured span | 54 cm configured span
Configured span | 35 cm | 54 cm
Light section length | 25 cm | 40 cm
Battery card length | 10 cm | 14 cm
Light section dimensions | 250 × 38 × 9 mm | 400 × 38 × 9 mm
Power | 1.3 W | 2 W
Power tolerance | ±10% | ±10%
Light output | 136 lm | 208 lm
Battery capacity | — | 3000 mAh
LED count | — | 146 LEDs
Hold time | — | 15 s
Battery design | Detachable battery card | Detachable battery card
Mounting | Magnetic mounting with adhesive steel plates | Magnetic mounting with adhesive steel plates
Dimming | Long-press dimming | Long-press dimming
Weight per set | 210 g | 300 g
Neutral box dimensions | 265 × 50 × 40 mm | 415 × 50 × 40 mm
Sets per carton | 60 sets | 30 sets
Carton dimensions | 425 × 270 × 300 mm | 425 × 270 × 300 mm
Carton weight | 13 kg | 10 kg

Factory specifications. Values not listed are stated on your quotation. A dash marks a value stated on your quotation.

35 cm configured span. Configuration reference: tdl-6111-35cm@3.
Enquire about 35 cm configured span

54 cm configured span. Configuration reference: tdl-6111-54cm@3.
Enquire about 54 cm configured span

EMC lab attestation DLE-260814001C
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; issued 17 August 2026.
Named subjects: TDL-6110X, 6110X-IR, 6110XRF-DJ, 6110XWB, 6111, 6112, 6113, 6118, 6108.
Family named; selected build still needs matching.
This EMC document is listed for the named model families; ask for the full document to check the length and battery build in your quotation.
Coverage of either selected TDL-6111 configuration still needs matching to the full document.
Do not use this EMC document to confirm battery capacity, runtime, water resistance, electrical safety or battery transport acceptance.
Request the full document and underlying test reports.
Ask whether the document covers the exact build in your quotation.
Request only: Full document and underlying test reports.
View the published document preview

## Charging and service access
The battery card charges while the bar stays on the wardrobe rail or cabinet. Replacement battery cards can be ordered separately. Ask for a written supply-continuity period if long-term maintenance matters.

## Certificates and test reports
EMC lab attestation DLE-260814001C names the TDL-6111 family.

## Related cabinet lights
![TDL-6110X rechargeable PIR cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-render-1.jpg)
TDL-6110X
![TDL-6110X-IR hand-wave and touch cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-ir.jpg)
TDL-6110X-IR

Quote TDL-6111 on WhatsApp Build an enquiry for TDL-6111 Compare the cabinet-light family What moves the price Download buyer summary

Notes

TDL-6111, 35 cm configured span: Factory specification: 25 cm light section plus 10 cm battery card. Please confirm the selected build on the quotation.

Battery capacity
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 LED count
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Hold time
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Sensing pack
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Charging connector
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Colour temperature
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Battery cell
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Factory build reference
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Runtime under agreed use conditions
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Separate replacement-card supply
 To be confirmed on your quotation.

Please confirm battery capacity on your quotation.
Please confirm led count on your quotation.
Please confirm hold time on your quotation.
Please confirm sensing pack on your quotation.
Please confirm charging connector on your quotation.
Please confirm colour temperature on your quotation.
Please confirm battery cell on your quotation.
Please confirm factory build reference on your quotation.
Please state runtime under agreed use conditions.
Confirm replacement-card availability, compatibility and order terms for the selected configuration.
Confirm on the quotation whether unit and carton weights are net or gross.

TDL-6111, 54 cm configured span: Factory specification: 40 cm light section plus 14 cm battery card. Please confirm the selected build on the quotation.

Sensing pack
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Charging connector
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Colour temperature
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Battery cell
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Factory build reference
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Runtime under agreed use conditions
 To be confirmed on your quotation.
 Separate replacement-card supply
 To be confirmed on your quotation.

Please confirm sensing pack on your quotation.
Please confirm charging connector on your quotation.
Please confirm colour temperature on your quotation.
Please confirm battery cell on your quotation.
Please confirm factory build reference on your quotation.
Please state runtime under agreed use conditions.
Confirm replacement-card availability, compatibility and order terms for the selected configuration.
Confirm on the quotation whether unit and carton weights are net or gross.

## Sample acceptance checklist
Confirm the selected configuration on your quotation.
The documents above name the model family. Match the full document to the selected build and destination before ordering.
Confirm replacement-card compatibility and availability for the selected configuration.
Confirm the installed location, card removal clearance, chosen sensing pack and connector during sample approval.
Select a configured span and the sensing pack you need. Confirm the selected connector, colour temperature and battery capacity before approving the sample.
Confirm selected output, battery cell, transport documents, unit and carton-weight basis and exact-model documents on the PI and sample. Confirm replacement-card availability, compatibility and order terms for the selected configuration.
Check configured span and card-removal clearance
Confirm PIR or hand-sweep pack
Confirm connector, CCT and battery-cell mapping
Confirm the compatible replacement-card part number and order terms

========================================================================
# TDL-6110X-IR Hand-Wave Cabinet Light | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/tdl-6110x-ir-hand-wave-touch-cabinet-light/
Summary: TDL-6110X-IR hand-wave and touch cabinet light for displays and work surfaces, in 12, 23, 40 and 60 cm, from TUODI's Zhaoqing factory.

Home > Cabinet lights > TDL-6110X-IR

## TDL-6110X-IR Hand-Wave & Touch Cabinet Light

A rechargeable hand-wave and touch light bar for displays and work surfaces, where ordinary PIR movement detection could create unwanted triggers.

Indicative wholesale US$4.91–13.05 a unit at 100–500 units for the 12, 23, 40 and 60 cm hand-sweep builds.

Hand-wave IR + touch
AUTO (90 s) and ON modes
Three colour temperatures
Brightness memory
12, 23, 40 and 60 cm

Quote TDL-6110X-IR on WhatsAppBuild an enquiry for TDL-6110X-IRDownload buyer summary

![TDL-6110X-IR hand-wave and touch cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-ir.jpg)

On this pageBest forControl behaviourMounting and chargingCertificates and test reportsNotes

## Best for
Displays and work surfaces, where a deliberate hand-wave or touch should switch the light instead of passing movement.

## Control behaviour
A hand-wave IR sensor and a touch sensor control the bar. AUTO is stated as 90 seconds and there is an ON mode. Touch cycles the available colour settings, long press dims, and brightness memory keeps the selected setting.
TDL-6110X-IR — Control behaviourConfiguration | Details
Control | Hand-wave IR plus touch
Modes | AUTO, stated as 90 s; ON
Colour and dimming | Three colour temperatures; long-press dimming; brightness memory
Battery by length | 300–2200 mAh across the hand-sweep lengths

## Mounting and charging
The bar uses a magnetic quick-mount arrangement and USB charging. It is a hand-wave/touch light bar for furniture, not a microwave hand-wave switch. Battery capacity runs from 300 to 2200 mAh across the hand-sweep lengths.

## Certificates and test reports
EMC lab attestation DLE-260814001C and RoHS test report DLR-260814022R name the TDL-6110X-IR family.

## Related cabinet lights
![TDL-6110X rechargeable PIR cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-render-1.jpg)
TDL-6110X
![TDL-6111 detachable battery sensor-light format](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-battery.jpg)
TDL-6111

Quote TDL-6110X-IR on WhatsApp Build an enquiry for TDL-6110X-IR Compare the cabinet-light family What moves the price Download buyer summary

Notes

Quotation review: 13 September 2026. Indicative USD product prices depend on the selected model, configuration and quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and current price validity are confirmed on quotation.

## Sample acceptance checklist
Confirm the selected configuration on your quotation.
The documents above name the model family. Match the full document to the selected build and destination before ordering.
The practical buyer decision is avoiding motion-sensor false triggers at a display or work surface. Position the hand-wave control in the actual intended reach and approve its behaviour there. Confirm the usable gesture distance and position on the sample.
Quote the selected length, charging connector, battery and colour setting. The 300–2200 mAh range applies across hand-sweep lengths, so confirm the battery for the selected bar.
Confirm gesture placement, touch response, AUTO timing, brightness memory and colour sequence on the selected sample. Record charging connector, exact battery configuration and any required documents on the PI.
Use the enquiry to state the intended mounting position, selected length and preferred control behaviour. Leave any unconfirmed configuration open for the quotation.
Test hand-wave and touch control in the intended position
Confirm the 90-second AUTO behaviour
Select exact length and battery configuration
Confirm charging connector and required documents on the PI

========================================================================
# TDL-6110XRF-DJ Remote Cabinet Light | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/tdl-6110xrf-dj-spliceable-remote-cabinet-light/
Summary: TDL-6110XRF-DJ spliceable 25 cm cabinet light bars grouped on the TDL-2041-DJ remote, from TUODI for furniture and OEM projects.

Home > Cabinet lights > TDL-6110XRF-DJ

## TDL-6110XRF-DJ Spliceable Remote-Control Cabinet Light

A 25 cm modular cabinet light for grouped bars controlled by the TDL-2041-DJ remote. It suits a layout that needs one remote to operate a small, planned group rather than a conventional single PIR bar.

25 cm bars join magnetically
PIR + 2.4G remote
1500 mAh per bar
Six or fewer bars per remote

Quote TDL-6110XRF-DJ on WhatsAppBuild an enquiry for TDL-6110XRF-DJDownload buyer summary

![TDL-6110XRF-DJ 9 mm slim remote-control light bar](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110xrf-dj-remote-2.jpg)
![Remote cabinet-light installation illustration](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110xrf-install.jpg)
Installation illustration.

On this pageBest for25 cm bar and remoteLayout and mountingCertificates and test reportsNotes

## Best for
Furniture layouts where one remote should switch a planned group of bars together. Plan groups of six or fewer bars per remote under current factory guidance.

## 25 cm bar and remote
The factory quotation identifies a 25 cm TDL-6110XRF-DJ configuration with 1.4 W, 120 lm, 1500 mAh, 30-second hold, −10 to 45 °C and a 250 × 40 × 9 mm bar. Each set ships with one light and one remote. Use 3 m / 90° as a starting point for PIR placement.
The TDL-2041-DJ remote uses two AAA batteries, which are not included. Its quoted remote range is 15 m and its sensing specification is 3 m. One remote is intended to drive multiple bars, with six or fewer as the planning maximum.
TDL-6110XRF-DJ — 25 cm bar and remoteConfiguration | Details
Per bar | 250 × 40 × 9 mm; 1.4 W; 120 lm; 1500 mAh; 30 s hold
PIR placement guide | 3 m / 90° as the starting point for placement
Remote | TDL-2041-DJ; 2 × AAA not included; 15 m remote range
Included | One light and one remote per set

## Layout and mounting
Use this configuration when you want coordinated control across a planned group of bars. Include the bar count, layout, power arrangement and intended pairing/recovery behaviour in your enquiry. The stated six-bar guidance is a practical factory recommendation, not an unlimited-chain promise.

## Certificates and test reports
EMC lab attestation DLE-260814001C and RoHS test report DLR-260814022R name the TDL-6110XRF-DJ family.

## Related cabinet lights
![TDL-6110X rechargeable PIR cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-render-1.jpg)
TDL-6110X
![TDL-6110X-IR hand-wave and touch cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-ir.jpg)
TDL-6110X-IR

Quote TDL-6110XRF-DJ on WhatsApp Build an enquiry for TDL-6110XRF-DJ Compare the cabinet-light family What moves the price Download buyer summary

Notes

The installation illustration is a guide: confirm the quoted power and connection arrangement and use an approved drawing for the selected build.

## Sample acceptance checklist
Confirm the selected configuration on your quotation.
The documents above name the model family. Match the full document to the selected build and destination before ordering.
Confirm the sensing field and the group arrangement on the selected sample.
Confirm magnetic joining, mounting, connections and compatibility on the selected build and sample. Check the exact arrangement before combining bars or remotes from different configurations.
Measure runtime at the agreed brightness and daily-use pattern on the selected sample. Do not use a generic runtime estimate for this configuration.
Confirm the selected group size, remote pairing, battery documents, remote-battery inclusion and final sensing behaviour on the quotation and sample. Include the number and layout of bars in the enquiry.
Test 3 m / 90° sensing in the actual layout
Test remote control across the selected number of bars
Confirm remote battery inclusion and pairing behaviour
Agree brightness and daily use, then measure runtime on the selected sample

========================================================================
# Night Light Manufacturer for Nursery & Baby | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/night-lights/
Summary: Compare TUODI MC550 nursery night-light platforms, LB-01 carrot lamps and sensor sconces for OEM, ODM and private-label orders.

Home › Night Lights

## Night Lights for Nursery & Home

 TUODI's night-light range is built around the MC550 portable nursery platform — one housing, several function packages — plus character lamps like the LB-01 carrot. Most are rechargeable (the LB-01 also comes as a plug-in build), all are cool-touch and designed for children's rooms, feeding, and moving around the house at night.

![TUODI MC550 portable nursery lamp with remote control and giftbox](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-mc550-rgb.jpg)

![MC550 clock variant lit warm with clock display showing](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/mc550t-clock-lit.jpg)

 TDL-MC550 series

## MC550 Portable Nursery Lamp — one platform, three function packages

 A carry-handle nursery lamp with a blank, doodle-friendly shell children can decorate with stickers and drawings. Choose the function package that fits your market:

 Clock variant (MC550TIME) | Night light + low-glow clock, three selectable colour temperatures and stepless dimming; 2200 mAh, 22 h at full brightness, 5.5 h charge; memory keeps your last setting

 White-noise variant (MC550BL) | Night light + soothing-sound library + Bluetooth 5.3 speaker (3 W) + portable lamp, single colour temperature with stepless dimming; 1500 mAh, 11 h at full brightness, 5.5 h charge

 Colour variant (MC550RF) | 20 ambient colour modes with a handheld remote; 2200 mAh, 10 h at full brightness, 5.5 h charge, use while charging

 Common to all three | 97 × 86 × 110 mm — one housing and one carton format across the platform, so mixed orders ship together. Weights: 260 g (colour), 270 g (clock); white-noise variant weight stated on your quotation

 Runtimes are at full brightness; at a nursery-level glow they last considerably longer. The clock variant appears as MC550T on some factory paperwork and MC550TIME on the current quotation: same product.

 Colour-variant code: the current quotation calls it MC550RF; older factory media uses MC550IR. Your quotation states the exact suffix and remote protocol. Do not swap one code for the other on order or certification paperwork.

 Soft, glare-free light suitable for breastfeeding, sleep and reading

 Portable handle — bedroom to hallway to camping lantern

 Charge-and-use design; light settings restored after power-off

 Indicative wholesale: MC550BL white-noise model US$12.12 / unit; MC550TIME clock model US$9.40 / unit; MC550RF colour lamp US$8.77 / unit · 100–500 units

 Ask about the MC550 series

![TUODI LB-01 carrot night light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/lb01-carrot.jpg)

 LB-01

## LB-01 — Carrot Night Light

 A character night light in two builds: USB-powered (plugs into any adapter, computer or car port) or with a lithium-battery base for cordless use. Full 2026 factory spec:

 Sensing | Microwave radar + daylight sensor · 2–3 m · 360° · 30 s hold

 Power / light | 5 V · 0.13 W · CRI 80 · warm, eye-friendly glow

 Environment / size | −10 °C to +55 °C · 44.7 × 44.7 × 111.4 mm

 Variants | USB plug-in, or with rechargeable battery base

 Companion model MC101: plug-in motion-activated version — one of the factory's best-selling cross-border items

 Indicative wholesale for LB-01 without base or with lithium-battery base only: US$4.60–7.94 / unit · 100–500 units. Companion MC101 is quoted separately and excluded from this range.

 Ask about LB-01

![TUODI TDL-7136 stainless sensor sconce night light on a wall](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-7136-sconce.jpg)

![TUODI sensor night light retail pack contents](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/nightlight-packshot.jpg)

 TDL-7136A/B · TDL-7133A/B

## Sensor Sconce Night Lights

 Wall-mounted battery sconces for hallways, stair landings and bedrooms — a step up in looks from a plug-in night light, with no wiring. Each retail box includes both mounting routes: 3M adhesive pads for tool-free fitting, or screws (wood screws for timber; 4.5–5 mm drill and expansion anchors for concrete).

 PIR motion activation with light sensing — off in daylight

 A models use AA dry cells; B models use a rechargeable lithium battery and include a charging cable

 Interlinked-sensing wall/footlight family also available (TDL-7136LD / 7155LD / 7156LD, 2.4G wireless)

 Indicative wholesale: 7136A/B US$5.85–7.94 / unit for 100–500 units; 7133A/B US$5.78–7.64 / unit, minimum 1,000 units

 Ask about the sconce series

## Product films

 Carrot night light — factory footage of the plug-in and tabletop builds, glowing in a dark room.

 MC550 clock variant — factory footage of the clock readout and touch dimming on a desk.

 Documents that name these models. The suffix-free code MC550 is named on the Japan Giteki certificate R 219-248097, the CE / RED attestation LCSA03114178E, the UKCA attestation LCSA05204134E and, as a reference part, the RoHS attestation LCSA03114180R; the MC-550 housing is covered by Chinese design patent ZL 2024 3 0399660.6. None of these names a suffix; ask which of MC550TIME, MC550BL or MC550RF a document covers before you rely on it. TDL-7133A and TDL-7136A are named on the CE-EMC certificate DLE-260814002C and the RoHS certificate DLR-260814023C. TDL-7136B and TDL-7136LD appear on the earlier CE / RED attestation LCSA101122078E, issued to Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics in 2022. For LB-01, the B sconce builds and any other code, ask for the document set for your model and market.

 Packaging options. Giftbox packaging, multi-language manuals and custom shell colours are available for all night-light models. These products are sold as comfort lighting — no medical or infant-safety claims are made beyond the documented certifications. Certification documents →

 Related: what drives the price white noise machine manufacturer private label night lights buyer FAQ

 Notes

 Quotation review: 13 September 2026. Indicative USD product prices depend on the selected model, configuration and quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and current price validity are confirmed on quotation.

========================================================================
# PIR & Microwave Sensor Switch Manufacturer | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/sensor-switches/
Summary: PIR and microwave radar sensor switches from TUODI, which started in sensor switches in 2005, including the TDL-2200J and TDL-2280J 86-type wall plates.

Home › Sensor Switches & Modules

## PIR & Microwave Sensor Switches, Modules and Remotes from TUODI, China

 TUODI designs and builds its own sensing electronics, the line it started with in 2005. Two engineering details recur across the range: Excelitas PIR elements behind precision Fresnel lenses with 4 mm² solid-copper terminals on the wall plates, and TUODI's own temperature-compensation chip in the ceiling and swivel switches, built for the common complaint that PIR range drops in hot weather.

 Get a sensor-switch quote on WhatsApp Build a switch enquiry

## Find the switch for your project

 Ceiling occupancy switches for corridors and stairwells

 Wall-plate PIR switches: flush 86-type plates

 Radar (microwave) sensor switches that sense through some plastics and thin panels

 OEM sensor modules and retrofit interfaces for lighting brands

 Certification: the sensor switch range is not certified as standard. Certification can sometimes be arranged per project; a lab quote is not a certificate.

![TUODI TDL-9956J recessed ceiling PIR sensor switch with spring clips](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-9956j-hero.jpg)

## Ceiling Occupancy Switches

 Recessed barrel switches for corridors and stairwells: TDL-9956J (10 A relay, spring-clip mounting) and TDL-9959J, plus a Tuya Wi-Fi variant (TDL-9953PIR-BL) for smart-building integrators.

## Wall-Plate PIR Switches

 Flush 86-type plates with Excelitas PIR + Fresnel optics and 4 mm² solid-copper terminals. The current catalogue model is the TDL-2200J: 100–240 V AC, 10 A, with a three-step delay (30 s / 3.5 min / 6 min) and a three-step daylight setting, 5–8 m detection, 86 × 86 × 43 mm.

 The 86-Type Wall-Plate PIR Switch (TDL-2280J) remains available to order, subject to component stock for the requested quantity.

## Microwave Radar Sensor Switches

 Doppler-radar switches sense through some plastics and thin panels. The Plug-Through Microwave Switch (TDL-2076WB) runs at 85–277 V AC, covers up to 8 m through 360°, and offers six sensitivity steps plus 3 / 15 / 30 / 60 s delay settings; loads are incandescent 1200 W, CFL or fluorescent 600 W, and LED 150 W maximum. The Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915) suits hotel corridors and stairwells (AC 85–250 V, 2–16 m adjustable, 8 s–12 min delay, 2–2000 lux, 70 mW standby, all three set by rotary trimmers).

 Microwave switches

![Recessed presence sensor render with spring clips and DIP bank](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/recessed-sensor-render.jpg)

## Human Presence Switches

 Lights that stay on for someone sitting still, the one thing PIR cannot do, for offices, meeting rooms and bathrooms. TUODI's 2026 catalogue lists a 24 GHz presence range: the TDL-9952 ceiling family, selected TDL-9953 variants, TDL-7159 in-luminaire modules and the TDL-2076-EX corded puck, with detection distances, delay ranges and light-control steps. The TDL-9953B-J uses 5.8 GHz instead; compare the TDL-9953 variants below. None has a radio certificate yet, and a transmitting sensor counts as radio equipment in most markets; tell us the room type, hold time and destination and you get the specification and the certification answer together.

![TUODI hand-wave inline switch for T5 T8 battens](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-7158wbt-hero.jpg)

## Hand-Wave & Cord-Set Switches

 Inline switches that install by plugging cords together: the Inline Hand-Wave Toggle (TDL-7158WB-T) for T5/T8 battens, Plug-Lead PIR Switch (TDL-2086), and photocell dusk-to-dawn switches.

 Hand-wave switches

![TUODI countdown timer switch operation](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-2116-timers.jpg)

## Timer & Countdown Switches

 86-type countdown plates for charging bays, laundry rooms and stairwells: Three-Step Countdown Timer (TDL-2116) and 16-Step DIP-Selectable Timer (TDL-2115).

 Timer switches

![TUODI OEM PIR module with remote probe](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-2012aj-module.jpg)

## OEM Modules & Retrofit Interfaces

 Board-level PIR modules with screw-in probes, a 12 V-to-mains relay interface, RF remotes and wireless modules (the technology behind the TDL-6110XRF-DJ spliceable system), and low-voltage DC cabinet accessories.

 OEM modules

![TUODI SR series touchless faucet adapter fitted to a spout, water flowing](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/sr-faucet-features.jpg)

## Touchless Faucet Adapters — SR-M01 / SR-T01

 Touchless faucet adapters shipping with standard M22/M24 thread adapters: SR-M01 senses hands near the spout (short-flow), SR-T01 toggles by hand-wave (long-flow); both auto-stop after 180 s if you forget. 0.25-second sensing, IPX6 marking, built-in aerator — and a 4000 mAh battery rated 5–10 years with no recharging, backed by a 3-year factory warranty (2026 spec).

 US$16.28 a unit at 100–500 units (SR-M01 or SR-T01)

## Key-Card Power Switches

 Hotel energy-saving systems from TUODI's electrical line can use a wireless card panel and relay receiver, with no control wiring between them. No model number or current product offer is available yet; send the room count and loads for a project review.

## TDL-9953 ceiling switches

 For ceiling-mounted lighting control in living rooms, meeting rooms, warehouses, hotels, offices and corridors. The model suffix sets the power supply, output and sensing technology.

 Model | Input and output | Sensing / distance | Delay

 TDL-9953BJ-DC | 12 V DC; dry-contact output | 24 GHz presence sensing; 3–5 m | 30 s

 TDL-9953B-J | 100–240 V AC; 800 W factory rating | 5.8 GHz microwave; 3–5 m | 30 s

 TDL-9953A-J | 100–240 V AC; 800 W factory rating | 24 GHz presence sensing; adjustable, up to 8.4 m | 15 s–18 h, adjustable

 TDL-9953BJ-BM | 100–240 V AC; 800 W factory rating | 24 GHz presence sensing; 2.4–6.6 m, adjustable | 5–600 s, adjustable

 The 800 W rating does not name a load type, so tell us the LED driver or other load, wiring, installation height and detection field you plan to use.

## TDL-2025 low-voltage LED-strip controllers

 For LED-strip control in homes, hotels, offices and shops. Choose a PIR motion-sensor version for movement-triggered lighting, or the CDS version for dusk-to-dawn control. These controllers use an external DC supply; select the matching voltage and load.

 Model | Supply / load rating | Control | Delay / operation

 TDL-2025 | 6–24 V DC / 5 A | PIR with daylight control | 18–360 s, adjustable

 TDL-2025-USB | 5 V DC / 2 A | PIR with daylight control | 18–360 s, adjustable

 TDL-2025Type-C | 5 V DC / 2 A | PIR with daylight control | 18–360 s, adjustable

 TDL-2025-CDS | 6–24 V DC / 5 A | Photocell; no PIR motion sensing | Off in daylight, on at night

## Fitting, plugs and indoor use

 The 86-type flush plates fit an 86 × 86 mm back box, standard in China, Southeast Asia and the Middle East (not EU 60 mm round or North American boxes). Cord-set products ship on a Chinese GB 2-pin plug that is changed to your market's plug at order time. Tell us the destination and we spec accordingly.

 Specify the switches as indoor products. The TDL-2086 and TDL-2076WB carry an IP54 marking and the SR-M01 / SR-T01 faucet adapters an IPX6 marking; these are the factory's own markings with no third-party ingress test, and the factory does not recommend the switches outdoors.

 Certification can be arranged per project, depending on model, scheme, market and voltage class. Unlike the lighting and white-noise ranges, the switches carry no standing CE, RoHS or FCC documents; tell us the model and destination before you write it into a tender.

 Datasheets by model. Tell us your application and ask for the voltage range, load rating, detection parameters and wiring diagram of the model you choose. Request datasheets on WhatsApp →

## Run-out stock

![TUODI TDL-2100BJ swivel-head PIR sensor switch with adjustable time, lux and direction](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-2100bj-hero.jpg)

## Swivel-Head PIR Switches

 Run-out — not for new designs. The Swivel-Head PIR Switch (TDL-2100BJ; 220 V AC, 800 W, 7–10 m detection, 5–500 lux threshold, 30–350 s hold; time, lux and direction adjustable on the head) is discontinued and remaining stock is being cleared. We quote it while stock lasts. Do not write it into a tender or long-run BOM; tell us the application and we will propose the current equivalent.

 Related: sensor-switch RFQ questions PIR vs radar vs hand-wave guide motion sensor cabinet lights OEM / ODM process 2026–2027 market brief buyer FAQ

 Notes

 TDL-2200J: design to 100–240 V; a wider 85–277 V figure circulates but belongs to a different model until the factory confirms otherwise.

 TDL-2280J: confirm quantity, current electrical specification and lead time before designing it into a repeat programme. A 2021 commissioned test report exists for this model, but a copy is not currently available. Request it only after its tested build is matched to the quoted build. It is a test report, not a certificate.

 Microwave switches: confirm the selected model, sensitivity, mounting position and behaviour through the actual panel or enclosure on the sample. The TDL-1915 has no radio certificate today; CE/RED can be quoted as project work and no FCC ID is currently available. Both microwave switches are indoor products.

 Key-card switches: confirm the receiver's default state, battery life and current rating before quotation; these points decide whether the installation is suitable and compliant.

 TDL-9953: for seated or stationary occupants, agree a room test; a presence-sensing label is not a measured stationary-detection guarantee.

 TDL-2025: check the connector, strip load, mounting position and PIR sensing field on the selected sample. The Type-C model is listed for 5 V DC; a Type-C connector does not establish USB Power Delivery support.

 TDL-9953 and TDL-2025 documents: internal test reports are the stated documentation basis; certification-body certificates are not currently available for these families. Request the internal report for the exact suffix and confirm the documents required for your destination before ordering. Internal testing does not establish radio certification.

 Ingress markings: read every IP number on this page the same way. Without a named test report beside it, it is a manufacturer's marking, not a tested rating. The X in IPX6 means the dust digit was never rated.

 Certification: a lab quote is not a certificate. Treat coverage as confirmed only when an issued document names the exact model.

========================================================================
# OEM / ODM Sensor Lighting & Electronics | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/oem-odm/
Summary: Sample-first TUODI OEM/ODM projects for sensor lighting and electronics: branding, packaging, housings, firmware, connected-product briefs, NDA.

Home › OEM / ODM

## OEM / ODM — your brand on TUODI sensor lights and white noise machines

 Put your logo, packaging, firmware and housing on a proven TUODI platform, or develop a new product with the factory's engineers. Brand and adapt an existing platform (OEM), or start from your own sample, drawing or specification (ODM). The factory holds 79 granted patents (63 Chinese, 16 international; see the patents and registered designs on file) and has run custom projects for export markets.

 Brand a TUODI product on WhatsApp Describe your branding request

## Three ways to start

## Catalogue product
Send a model or shortlist, quantity and destination. Ask for the current configuration, sample and quotation.
MOQ: small wholesale orders of stock product; mixed-model trials negotiable
Timing, as a guide: samples 3–5 days; standard bulk orders 20–25 days from order and payment
Build a catalogue enquiry →

## Your brand
Name the base model and the logo, finish, packaging or manual changes you want. The quotation sets out the scope and price for that model.
MOQ: higher than stock product, set by printing minimums
Timing, as a guide: 25–30 days for bulk orders with a custom logo or custom packaging, from order and payment
Describe your branding request →

## Custom development
Describe the required behaviour, interfaces and sample tests. Engineering feasibility comes before a production commitment.
MOQ and tooling: project-specific; a custom bar length is a tooling job with its own minimum order
Timing: set on the project quotation after feasibility review
Build a feasibility brief →

 For a product-specific brief: furniture lighting, sound machines or sensor modules. Matter, Zigbee and Z-Wave products are development projects, not catalogue products: see what to specify for a connected product.

## What you can put your brand on

 Logo and finish: logo printing or laser engraving, custom colourways

 Packaging and manuals: giftbox and blister packaging, multi-language manuals

 Firmware and function: sensing behaviour (range, hold time, daylight threshold), colour temperatures, brightness levels, sound libraries on white-noise products, PCB and firmware modifications

 Housing and hardware: housing changes, custom bar lengths cut from an existing aluminium profile (a tooling job with its own minimum order), battery capacity, connector type

 Full ODM: new product development from your sample, drawing or functional specification

 Base platforms with their own pages: TDL-6110X rechargeable PIR cabinet light, MC330 white noise clock and sensor modules.

## How a project runs

 1 · You describe the requirement (or pick a catalogue item to modify)

 2 · Feasibility review and quotation by the factory engineering team

 3 · Samples are made to the agreed specification

 4 · You test and give feedback; samples are revised until you approve them

 5 · Order placed against the approved sample — which becomes the golden sample production is measured against; changes after approval go through agreement, not improvisation

 6 · Delivery — with export documentation for your market

 Discuss a project on WhatsApp

![TUODI OEM and ODM technological process flowchart](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/oem-odm-process.jpg)

![SMT placement machine in the TUODI factory](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-smt.jpg)

 MOQ, tooling and lead time depend on the model and the depth of customisation, so they are quoted per project rather than advertised as one-size-fits-all numbers. Send your target product and quantity and you will get a concrete quotation, not a form reply.

## Connected and smart products: what to specify

 Available today: proprietary RF/2.4G products and one Tuya Wi-Fi sensor-switch variant. Matter, Zigbee or Z-Wave products and mains-outage logging are ODM development projects. Buyer inquiries often combine a sensor, a wireless protocol, a hub, an app and event reporting in one sentence; those are separate interfaces, and a product that can switch a load does not automatically report power cuts, keep timestamps offline or join a buyer's Matter, Zigbee or Z-Wave system.

 Layer | Define before feasibility | Sample test

 Radio & commissioning | Protocol and version, frequency/region, hub/controller, pairing/reset flow, maximum network and coexistence requirements. | Pair, remove and re-pair on the buyer's target hub; test range and recovery after an interrupted setup.

 Events & telemetry | Which events are reported—motion, relay state, mains-off/on time or outage duration—plus timestamp source, accuracy, time zone and offline buffer. | Create real power cuts and network outages; compare the local state, stored log and app/API record after reconnection.

 App, API & cloud | Buyer app or supplier app, API/data format, accounts, cloud region, retention, export, privacy roles and ongoing service dependency. | Complete the intended user journey and export the required event data; document what stops working without internet or cloud service.

 Firmware ownership | Source/binary ownership, credentials, signing, OTA update path, support period, vulnerability handling and change approval. | Record firmware and module revisions on the golden sample; define which changes force re-testing or re-certification.

 Market documents | Exact radio module, final host product, destination schemes and who pays for or owns testing and registrations. | Issued documents mapped to the production hardware—not a module name, lab quotation or proposed certification route.

 If drawings, firmware or manuals are confidential, request the mutual-NDA step in the project brief before technical exchange.

## Questions buyers ask about OEM and ODM projects

 Can TUODI cut a cabinet light to a custom length that isn't in your standard size table?

 Yes, as a custom build. A length outside the size table is cut on the factory's own cutting equipment from an existing aluminium profile, with tooling and a minimum order of its own. On the TDL-6110X platform a 50 cm bar comes from the 60 cm profile at 250 or 300 lm with a 3000 or 4500 mAh pack, sample 5-7 days and production 25-30 days. Your quotation states the figures for your own length.

 If TUODI cuts a custom-length cabinet light for my brand, does it carry the same CE, RoHS and FCC coverage as the standard lengths?

 Not automatically. The CE-EMC attestation DLE-260814001C names the TDL-6110X lengths 23, 40, 60, 80 and 90 cm, so another length is not named on it. For the EU, ask us how the manufacturer's conformity assessment, technical documentation and EU declaration of conformity cover your exact build, and ask about RoHS and FCC coverage for that build separately.

 Once I approve a sample for my OEM order, can the factory change materials or components before mass production?

 No. Your approved sample becomes the golden sample the production run is measured against, so materials, components or finish are not swapped on the factory's own initiative: a change after approval is put to you and agreed first. Write the golden sample, lot tests, change control and failure remedy into the purchase order before the first volume run.

 How do I share confidential drawings or specifications with TUODI before starting an ODM project?

 Ask for the mutual-NDA step in the same project brief that describes your requirement, before any technical exchange. It is the step to use for confidential drawings, firmware or manuals. Say what you treat as confidential when you raise it, so the scope is agreed before drawings, source files or test data move in either direction.

 Does TUODI's patent protect the custom design or length my ODM project develops?

 No. The factory's US design patent D872,339 S covers one lamp's ornamental appearance and is tied to no model number, so it protects neither a platform's function nor a custom length or housing your project develops. Raise IP ownership, including firmware source or binary ownership on a connected project, as a term in your project brief before technical work starts.

 Related: sensor modules & relay interfaces complete RFQ checklist sample-to-scale ordering serviceable product design sample testing all buyer insights

========================================================================
# Inside the TUODI Factory in Zhaoqing | SMT, Testing & Packing
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/factory/
Summary: TUODI's Zhaoqing factory: SMT, reflow, integrating spheres, ageing racks and laser marking; about one million units a year by its figures. Live video tours.

Home › Factory

## Inside the TUODI sensor-lighting factory in Zhaoqing, China

 Around one million units a year, by the factory's own figures, from TUODI's production base in Sihui, Zhaoqing, Guangdong, on equipment the factory lists as 2 SMT placement machines, an 8-temperature-zone reflow oven, CNC machining, laser marking, 2 integrating spheres, oscilloscopes and 4 ageing racks.

 See it working before you order: electronics placement and reflow, product assembly, laser marking, photometric and battery checks, ageing racks, connected-unit benches, finished goods and packing, on a live video call or an in-person visit.

 Book a live factory walk-through Visit the factory

## Production and test equipment

![Integrating sphere photometric measurement equipment](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/lab-integrating-sphere.jpg)
 Integrating spheres (2 units) — photometric measurement of flux and colour

![LED ageing rack running blue light bars](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/lab-aging-rack.jpg)
 Ageing racks (4 units) — extended burn-in of finished lights

![Battery grading and testing cabinet](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/lab-battery-grading.jpg)
 Battery grading cabinet — capacity testing of rechargeable cells

## The production floor on video

 Production and testing at Guangdong Tuodi Electronics in Zhaoqing, filmed on the current factory floor.

 Current Zhaoqing production floor — 44 seconds of production and testing at Guangdong Tuodi Electronics.

 Photometric lab — an 8-second pan across the integrating sphere and test cabinet at the Zhaoqing factory.

Supply-Powered Cabinet Light Bars (TDL-7148) on an ageing run — 60 cm supply-powered bars left running on a bench, hand-swept to switch and stepped through three colour temperatures.

## Three factory processes on video

 A functional fixture check, laser marking and a connected switch test bench in use.

 Illuminated fixture check — a gloved operator uses the factory's functional-check station.

 Laser marking — a TUODI mark is applied to an aluminium light housing.

 Connected switch test bench — an operator works with connected switch units at the bench.

## From electronics to finished assembly

![TUODI assembly line with conveyor](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-line-1.jpg)
 Assembly line

![Assembly stations at the TUODI factory](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-line-2.jpg)
 Assembly stations

![SMT pick-and-place machine at the TUODI factory](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-smt.jpg)
 SMT room — surface-mount placement

## How a production order moves through quality control

 A five-stage path for sensor-switch and rechargeable-light builds. The inspection plan for your order names the tests and pass limits at each stage.

## Incoming material
Check the received components and materials against the order specification.

## SMT & PCBA
Place and inspect electronics before soldering and subassembly move forward.

## Finished function
Check switching, sensing distance/behaviour, light response and controls for the configured product.

## Charge & ageing
For rechargeable-light orders, define the charge, illumination and ageing stage required for that build.

## Pack & lot check
Confirm appearance, accessories, labels and packaging, then apply the agreed shipment-lot sample plan.

![Factory-supplied illuminated fixture station during a hands-on light check](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-fixture-functional-check.jpg)
 Function check: an illuminated unit is checked at a fixture station.

![Laser marking a TUODI logo on an aluminium sensor-light housing](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-laser-marking.jpg)
 Private label: a TUODI mark is laser-applied to an aluminium light housing.

![Connected light products illuminated together on a factory test bench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-batch-light-check.jpg)
 Batch check: connected products are illuminated together on a factory bench.

 Put the tests on the order: sample size, duration, pass limits, record format and failed-lot remedy. Compare supplier proposals with the picture-led quality comparison and build your checks with the sample acceptance planner.

 See 15 more factory-floor and engineering photographs

 Unretouched factory photographs of engineering workstations, assembly, work-in-process, connected-unit checks, finished bars and SMT equipment. They show the stations at work.

![Factory workbench fixture station](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-fixture-station.jpg)
 Workbench fixture station.

![Factory assembly area with workstations and blue work-in-process bins](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-assembly-area.jpg)
 Assembly area and work-in-process bins.

![Hands assembling round sensor modules at a factory workstation](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-manual-assembly.jpg)
 Manual assembly at a workstation.

![Blue parts bins beside a factory work area](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-parts-bins.jpg)
 Parts and work-in-process storage.

![Connected units and wiring on factory racks](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-connected-racks.jpg)
 Connected-unit racks.

![Multiple round light units illuminated together on a factory bench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-lit-round-units.jpg)
 Illuminated multi-unit bench.

![Handheld check over finished rectangular light units](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-finished-unit-check.jpg)
 Finished-unit spot check.

![Rows of connected round light units on a factory bench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-connected-bench.jpg)
 Connected-unit bench.

![Finished aluminium light bars grouped at a factory workstation](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-finished-bars.jpg)
 Finished aluminium light bars.

![Multi-tier factory rack with connected units showing green indicators](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-indicator-rack.jpg)
 Operating units on an indicator rack.

![SMT placement equipment and component feeders on the factory floor](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-floor-smt-feeders.jpg)
 SMT placement equipment and feeders.

![TUODI employee working at a dual-monitor electronics engineering workstation](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-engineering-electronics-workstation.jpg)
 Electronics engineering workstation.

![TUODI employee working with a three-dimensional product model on screen](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-product-design-workstation.jpg)
 Three-dimensional product-design workstation.

![TUODI employee working at a connected switch test bench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-switch-test-workstation.jpg)
 Connected switch test workstation.

![TUODI employee checking connected light units on a rack](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-connected-unit-worker-check.jpg)
 Hands-on connected-unit check.

## Offices and meeting rooms

 Zhaoqing reception, certificate wall and meeting rooms — a 34-second walk from the entrance of Guangdong Tuodi Electronics to the rooms where buyer visits start.

![Historical reception of Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics with company sign](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-reception.jpg)
 Historical Shenzhen company reception — not the current visit address

![Reception of Guangdong Tuodi Electronics at the Zhaoqing factory](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-reception-entrance.jpg)
 Current factory reception — Guangdong Tuodi, Zhaoqing

![Office area at the TUODI factory](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-office.jpg)
 Office area

![Meeting room at the TUODI factory](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-meeting.jpg)
 Meeting room — where buyer visits start

## At international exhibitions

 TUODI has exhibited its sensor-lighting range at international lighting fairs since 2017, including events in Russia and Turkey.

![TUODI stand E-110 at the IstanbulLight international lighting fair in Turkey](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tradeshow-istanbul-2.jpg)
 Stand E-110, IstanbulLight (Turkey) — faces pixelated for privacy

![Visitors viewing TUODI sensor lighting on the exhibition stand](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tradeshow-istanbul-1.jpg)
 Sensor-lighting range on the stand

![TDL-6110 series sensor lights demonstrated on the TUODI exhibition stand](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tradeshow-istanbul-3.jpg)
 Demonstrating the TDL-6110 series

## Live video call, visit or third-party inspection

## Live walk-through or visit
See the stations that matter for your product on a live video call or in person.

## Model documents
Match the exact model and destination to the certificates and test reports.

## Sample checks
Turn the application into pass/fail tests with the sample acceptance planner.

## Production-order inspection
Third-party inspection (your agency or ours) is welcome on production orders. Arrange it with the international sales team.

 Visit the production base. Room 502, 5th Floor, Building B2, 41 Dawang Avenue, Dawang Hi-tech Zone, Zhaoqing Wanyang Zhongchuangcheng, Sihui City, Zhaoqing City, Guangdong, China 526200. Search this address in Google Maps → Showrooms at both sites: Shenzhen for a sales or product meeting, Zhaoqing for the showroom and production inspection. Arrange a Zhaoqing tour →

 Notes

 The equipment list and the figure of around one million units of annual output are supplied by the factory.

 These options help you inspect a proposed order. They do not replace the qualification, documents or audit requirements set by your customer or destination market.

 TDL-7148 ageing-run video: no duration, pass limit or result is shown; agree the ageing stage and its limit for your own build.

 The photographs show the stations at work; the inspection coverage for your order is confirmed on the order.

 The Google Maps link is an address search, not a gate pin, so confirm the visitor entrance and pickup plan before booking travel.

 The older warehouse footage below is from the company's earlier premises, so it is not what you would see on a visit.

 Earlier TUODI warehouse tour — company history, not the current factory.

========================================================================
# Certificates, Test Reports & Patents by Model | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/certifications/
Summary: TUODI FCC, Japan radio, PSE, UKCA, CE and RoHS documents by model, plus Chinese and international patents, with each document's scope stated.

Home › Certifications & Patents

## Certificates, test reports and patents for TUODI products

 Documents held by model and family: FCC ID 2A8ZP-MC330 and Japan Giteki R 219-248097 on the white-noise platform; a 2026 CE-EMC certificate and RoHS test report naming twenty rechargeable cabinet-light entries; 2026 CE-EMC and RoHS certificates for the battery TDL-71xx sensor lights; 2026 CE, UKCA and FCC Part 15B documents for the CL04/CL05 camping lights; and registered designs in China, the United States, the EU and the UK.

 For an exact document set, send the product model, configuration and destination market.

 Ask for the documents for your model Cabinet-light documents

## Certification schemes by market

 CE (EMC / RED / LVD) | European Union — sensor lights, camping lights and white-noise electronics

 RoHS | EU restriction of hazardous substances

 FCC | United States — including a granted FCC ID (2A8ZP-MC330) equipment authorization on the Bluetooth white-noise platform

 TELEC / Giteki (Japan radio) | Japan MIC type-based certificate R 219-248097 covering the white-noise machine family

 PSE | Japan electrical safety: test result certificate AOC211022001S (2021, issued to Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics) for an 8 W LED atmosphere lamp and the listed models only

 UKCA | United Kingdom conformity

 ErP / energy labelling | EU energy label artwork for the LED under-cabinet light (TDL-7161; class A, 3 kWh/1000h) prepared by the manufacturer. It is label artwork, not a test report or product registration

![The certificate display at the TUODI factory: a framed document labelled ISO 9001, CE-EMC, FCC, RoHS, PSE and UKCA documents, an EU energy label for the LED under-cabinet light (TDL-7161), alongside Chinese and US design patents and an EU registered design](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/certificates-wall.jpg)

 The certificate display at the factory. Individual documents are shown full size below and sent as PDFs on request.

## Documents by model and family

 Swipe or scroll sideways to view all columns.

 FCC ID 2A8ZP-MC330 | Two TCB grants of equipment authorization (Part 15C, DSS + DTS), 2024 — white-noise Bluetooth platform

 Japan Giteki R 219-248097 | MIC type-based radio certificate, 29 Apr 2024 — names nine models verbatim, among them MC220, MC330 and a suffix-free “MC550”. Every offered MC550 carries a suffix (BL / TIME / RF), so require written coverage confirmation for the exact variant on the quotation

 CE RED + UKCA + RoHS, white noise | Attestations of compliance with EMC, radio, EMF and EN 62368-1 safety test reports (2024); RoHS attestation LCSA03114180R

 CE / RED, sensor lights | Earlier attestations issued to Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics: LCSA101122078E (2022, brand TUODI, 19 models) and LCSA10233108E (2023, brand N/A, with Article 3.1a safety marked N/A)

 CE-EMC, rechargeable cabinet lights | Certificate DLE-260814001C, 17 Aug 2026, with the full test report behind it, DLE-260814001R (Shenzhen DL Testing Technology, received 14 Aug 2026, tested 14–17 Aug 2026, reported 17 Aug 2026, to EN IEC 55015:2019+A11:2020). Certificate and report name the same twenty models and lengths, applicant and manufacturer Guangdong Tuodi Electronics, Zhaoqing

 CE-EMC + RoHS, battery sensor lights | 2026 certificates DLE-260814002C (EMC) and DLR-260814023C (RoHS) for the battery TDL-71xx series; each states it is valid only with its test report, so ask for the reports with the certificates. Note that RoHS certificate DLR-260814023C is the battery-series document: it names seventeen TDL-71xx models and does not name TDL-6110X. For the rechargeable cabinet-light range, see RoHS test report DLR-260814022R, which names the same twenty entries as DLE-260814001C. It lists no 30 cm or custom length, so ask whether a RoHS certificate covers the build you are ordering

 CE-EMC, UKCA-EMC + FCC, camping lights | 2026 certificates with their test reports for the CL04/CL05 family: DLE-260320010C with DLE-260320010R, DLE-260320009C with DLE-260320009R (both reports carry the CNAS L11567 mark), and FCC Part 15B DLE-260320011C with DLE-260320011R

 UKCA, cabinet lights | Earlier attestation LCSB070323005E (2023, applicant Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics, no manufacturer field) to four BS EN standards

 PSE-route test, Japan | Earlier test result certificate AOC211022001S (2021), J60598-2-4(H29) and J60598-1(H29), Passed, for the listed models only

TDL-2115 countdown timer | Internal test reports only; no certification-body certification is available. This status applies to TDL-2115 only.

## Certificate and test-report images

 Open any document below to read it full size. Each caption states the document type, the issuer and the models it names. Full PDFs and the underlying test reports are sent on request.

 For an exact-model document question, use the Product Finder to identify the build, then add the document request to the RFQ checklist.

## Cabinet-light documents by model

 Certificate DLE-260814001C and RoHS test report DLR-260814022R name these model families. Test report DLE-260814001R, behind the certificate, was tested to EN IEC 55015:2019+A11:2020 between 14 and 17 August 2026.

 Model family | Published documents

TDL-6110X | DLE-260814001C (EMC); DLR-260814022R (RoHS test report)

TDL-6110X-IR | DLE-260814001C (EMC); DLR-260814022R (RoHS test report)

TDL-6110XRF-DJ | DLE-260814001C (EMC); DLR-260814022R (RoHS test report)

TDL-6111 | DLE-260814001C (EMC); DLR-260814022R (RoHS test report)

![FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization, FCC ID 2A8ZP-MC330, issued to Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-fcc-id-grant.jpg)

 Granted authorizationFCC ID 2A8ZP-MC330Grant of Equipment Authorization issued under FCC authority by TCB KL-Certification GmbH, 13 Jun 2024. Equipment class Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter, Part 15C, 2402–2480 MHz. Holder: Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics. A second grant, shown next, covers the Digital Transmission System equipment class.

![Second FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization for FCC ID 2A8ZP-MC330, Digital Transmission System class, issued to Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-fcc-id-grant-dts.jpg)

 Granted authorizationFCC ID 2A8ZP-MC330 (DTS)Second Grant of Equipment Authorization from TCB KL-Certification GmbH, 13 Jun 2024. Equipment class Digital Transmission System, Part 15C, 2402–2480 MHz, notes "white noise machine". Holder: Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics.

![Japan MIC type-based radio certificate 219-248097 for TUODI white noise machines](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-japan-giteki.jpg)

 Granted certificationJapan Giteki R 219-248097MIC type-based certificate under Radio Law Art. 38-24, issued by Registered Certification Body 219, 29 Apr 2024. Names nine models: MC220, MC330, MC230, MC350, MC550, MC588, TDL-220/330/588.

![CE RED attestation of compliance LCSA03114178E for TUODI white noise machines](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-ce-red-whitenoise.jpg)

 Lab attestationCE / RED — LCSA03114178EAttestation of compliance to RED 2014/53/EU (Art. 3.1a, 3.1b, 3.2), 12 Apr 2024, backed by EMC, radio, EMF-exposure and EN 62368-1 safety test reports. Same nine white-noise models.

![UKCA attestation LCSA05204134E for TUODI white noise machines](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-ukca-whitenoise.jpg)

 Lab attestationUKCA — LCSA05204134EAttestation to the UK Radio Equipment Regulations 2017, 12 Apr 2024, for the white-noise range.

![RoHS attestation of compliance LCSA03114180R for TUODI white noise machines](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-rohs-whitenoise.jpg)

 Lab attestationRoHS — LCSA03114180RAttestation to RoHS 2011/65/EU and (EU) 2015/863, 11 Apr 2024, tested to the IEC 62321 series. Part MC220; reference parts MC330, MC230, MC350, MC550, MC588 and TDL-220/330/588.

![Cover page of EN IEC 62368-1 safety test report LCSA03114179S for the TUODI white noise machine](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-safety-report-whitenoise.jpg)

 Test reportEN IEC 62368-1 safety — LCSA03114179S78-page type-test report to EN IEC 62368-1:2020+A11:2020, 7 Apr 2024, LCS. The safety evidence behind the CE / RED attestation above; sent in full on request.

![CE EMC certificate of conformity DLE-260814001C for TUODI rechargeable sensor cabinet lights](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-ce-emc-rechargeable.jpg)

 Lab attestationCE / EMC — DLE-260814001CEMC Directive 2014/30/EU, 17 Aug 2026, valid only together with test report DLE-260814001R. Names TDL-6110X at 23, 40, 60, 80 and 90 cm, TDL-6110X-IR both unqualified and at 23, 40, 60 and 80 cm, plus 6110X-C, 6110XRF-DJ, 6110XWB, 6110TIME, 6110, 6111, 6112, 6113, 6118 and 6108. Lengths outside that list, including the 30 cm and any custom length, are not named on it: ask how the manufacturer's conformity assessment, technical documentation and EU declaration of conformity cover the exact build you order.

![Cover page of RoHS test report DLR-260814022R for TUODI rechargeable sensor cabinet lights](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-rohs-report-rechargeable.jpg)

 Test reportRoHS test report — DLR-260814022RShenzhen DL Testing Technology, tested 14–20 Aug 2026 with reference to RoHS Directive (EU) 2015/863, conclusion PASS, version dated 24 Aug 2026, 21 pages. Applicant and manufacturer Guangdong Tuodi Electronics. It names the same twenty entries as the EMC certificate above, from TDL-6110X-IR to TDL-6108. It is a laboratory test report rather than a certificate of conformity, and it names no 30 cm or custom length: ask how the manufacturer's conformity assessment, technical documentation and EU declaration of conformity cover the exact build you order.

![CE EMC certificate of conformity DLE-260814002C for TUODI battery sensor lights](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-ce-emc-battery.jpg)

 Lab attestationCE / EMC — DLE-260814002CEMC Directive 2014/30/EU, 17 Aug 2026, for the battery-powered sensor-light series: TDL-7120, 7125, 7126, 7127, 7132, 7133A, 7134, 7136A and others.

![RoHS certificate of conformity DLR-260814023C for TUODI sensor lights](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-rohs-sensorlight.jpg)

 Lab attestationRoHS — DLR-260814023CRoHS Directive (EU) 2015/863, 24 Aug 2026, battery sensor-light series, supported by IEC 62321 chemical testing.

![CE EMC certificate DLE-260320010C for TUODI CL04 and CL05 camping lights](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-ce-emc-camping.jpg)

 Lab attestationCE / EMC — DLE-260320010CEMC Directive 2014/30/EU, 24 Mar 2026, camping and work-light family (CL02–CL06 codes incl. TD-CL04 and TD-CL05). Testing performed by a CNAS-accredited laboratory; the UKCA-EMC certificate below covers the UK.

![Cover page of EMC test report DLE-260320010R for TUODI TD-CL04 and TD-CL05 camping lights](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-emc-report-camping.jpg)

 Test reportEMC test report — DLE-260320010RShenzhen DL Testing Technology, tested 20 Mar 2026, report dated 24 Mar 2026, 34 pages, result Pass; the cover carries the CNAS L11567 mark. EN IEC 55015:2019+A11:2020, the EN 61000 series and EN 61547:2009. Product "EDC Clip Light": LX-CL04, LX-CL05, LX-CL06, LX-CL02, LX-CL03, TD-CL04 and TD-CL05; applicant Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics, manufacturer Guangdong Tuodi Electronics. The report behind certificate DLE-260320010C.

![FCC Part 15B supplier declaration support document DLE-260320011C for TUODI camping lights](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-fcc-camping.jpg)

 Lab attestationFCC Part 15B — DLE-260320011CSupplier's-declaration support document with ANSI C63.4 emissions testing, 24 Mar 2026, same camping-light family. Part 15B products carry no FCC ID — the declaration route is correct here.

![Cover page of FCC Part 15B test report DLE-260320011R for TUODI TD-CL04 and TD-CL05 camping lights](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-fcc-report-camping.jpg)

 Test reportFCC Part 15B test report — DLE-260320011RShenzhen DL Testing Technology, tested 20 Mar 2026, report dated 24 Mar 2026, 21 pages, result Pass, to FCC Part 15 Subpart B and ANSI C63.4:2014. Same seven camping-light models, applicant and manufacturer. The report behind DLE-260320011C.

![UKCA EMC certificate of conformity DLE-260320009C for TUODI CL04 and CL05 camping lights](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-ukca-camping.jpg)

 Lab attestationUKCA / EMC — DLE-260320009CCertificate of conformity to the UK EMC Regulations (S.I. 2016 No. 1091), 24 Mar 2026, tested to BS EN IEC 55015 and the BS EN 61000 series. Same seven camping-light models; manufacturer named as Guangdong Tuodi Electronics, Zhaoqing.

![Cover page of BS EN EMC test report DLE-260320009R for TUODI TD-CL04 and TD-CL05 camping lights](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-ukca-report-camping.jpg)

 Test reportUK EMC test report — DLE-260320009RShenzhen DL Testing Technology, tested 20 Mar 2026, report dated 24 Mar 2026, 33 pages, result Pass; the cover carries the CNAS L11567 mark. BS EN IEC 55015:2019+A11:2020, the BS EN 61000 series and BS EN 61547:2009. Same seven camping-light models, applicant and manufacturer. The report behind UKCA-EMC certificate DLE-260320009C.

## Earlier documents issued to Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics

 These documents from 2021 to 2023 name Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics as holder or applicant.

![Japan PSE-route test result certificate AOC211022001S for a TUODI LED atmosphere lamp, 2021](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-pse-aoc211022001s.jpg)

 Test result certificatePSE route, Japan — AOC211022001SEarlier document, Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics (applicant and manufacturer). Shenzhen AOCE Electronic Technology Service (AOC-Testing), 22 Oct 2021, page 1 of 2; the type classification is in Attachment 1, which is not shown. "LED Atmosphere lamp", trademark TUODI, 100–240 V~, 50/60 Hz, 0.35 A, 8 W, tested to J60598-2-4(H29) and J60598-1(H29), result Passed. Lists TDL-8193, 8193B, 8193B-5V, 8193B-12V, 8192, 8190, 6110, 6111, 6110X, 7116, 7116S-A, 7127, 7136, 7120 and 6102. It covers the evaluated sample and does not imply assessment of other products of the same design: confirm your model and current build.

![CE RED attestation of compliance LCSA101122078E for TUODI LED motion sensor lights, 2022](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-ce-red-sensorlight-2022.jpg)

 Lab attestationCE / RED — LCSA101122078EEarlier document, Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics (approval holder and manufacturer). Shenzhen LCS Compliance Testing Laboratory, 25 Oct 2022, page 1 of 2; RED 2014/53/EU Articles 3.1a, 3.1b and 3.2 marked Conform. "LED Motion sensor light", brand TUODI: TDL-7156, 7155, 7136LD, 7136B, 6110XRF, 6111, 8192, 8193, 8193B, 7138RF, 7134S, 6110D, 7157, 7158, 7145, 7146, 6110X, 6113 and 7119. It names plain TDL-7158, not TDL-7158WB.

![CE RED attestation of compliance LCSA10233108E for LED sensor lights, 2023](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-ce-red-sensorlight-2023.jpg)

 Lab attestationCE / RED — LCSA10233108EEarlier document, Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics (approval holder and manufacturer). Shenzhen LCS Compliance Testing Laboratory, 3 Nov 2023, page 1 of 2. "Led sensor Light LED", brand N/A: TDL-6110XRF, TDL-6110XRF-38CM, TDL-2041, 65738, TDL-6110XRF-24CM, TDL-7155, 7156, 7138RF, 9986RF, 6110RF, 7109 and 7110. Article 3.1a health, 3.1b and 3.2 are marked Conform; Article 3.1a safety is marked N/A, so this attestation does not cover electrical safety.

![UKCA attestation of compliance LCSB070323005E for LED under-cabinet lights, 2023](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-ukca-cabinet-2023.jpg)

 Lab attestationUKCA / EMC — LCSB070323005EEarlier document, Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics (applicant; the document has no manufacturer field). Shenzhen Southern LCS Compliance Testing Laboratory, 10 Jul 2023, UK Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016 (SI 2016 No 1091). "LED Under Cabinet Light", trade mark N/A, tested to BS EN IEC 55015:2019+A11:2020, BS EN IEC 61000-3-2:2019+A1:2021, BS EN 61000-3-3:2013+A1:2019+A2:2021 and BS EN 61547:2009: TDL-7148, 7147, 7160, 7161, 6110D, 6105, 7119, 7145, 7149, 7143, 7142, 5016, 5013, 5015, 5024 and 5011.

## Patents & registered designs

 The records shown below include US design patent D872,339 (sensor cabinet light, 2020), Chinese design patents for the MC220 white-noise speaker (ZL 2023 3 0560471.8), the MC-550 nursery lamp (ZL 2024 3 0399660.6) and the CL04/CL05 camping lights (granted 2026), the EU registered design 015119914-0001 and UK registered designs 6479362 / 6479363 for the camping-light pair (2025).

![US design patent D872,339 assigned to Shenzhen Tuodi Electronic Co Ltd for a sensor lamp](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-us-patent-d872339.jpg)

 Granted patentUS D872,339 SUnited States design patent for the sensor bar lamp, granted 7 Jan 2020, assigned to Shenzhen Tuodi. 15-year term.

![EUIPO registered Community design 015119914-0001 held by Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-eu-design-cl05.jpg)

 Registered designEU RCD 015119914-0001EUIPO registered Community design for the CL05 hand lamp, filed 13 Oct 2025, registered 14 Oct 2025, holder Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics. The register page shown lists the product as "Hand lamps" and a Chinese priority application of 25 Sep 2025.

![UK registered design 6479363 for pocket torches, Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-uk-design-cl04.jpg)

 Registered designUK design 6479363UK IPO registration for "pocket torches" (the CL04 clip light), registered 13 Oct 2025. A companion registration, 6479362, shown next, covers the CL05 hand lamp.

![UK registered design 6479362 for hand lamps, Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-uk-design-cl05.jpg)

 Registered designUK design 6479362UK IPO registration for "hand lamps" (the CL05 hand lamp), registered 13 Oct 2025 and granted 21 Oct 2025, holder Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics.

![Chinese design patent ZL 2025 3 0586531.2 for the CL04 travel light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cn-design-cl04.jpg)

 Granted patentCN ZL 2025 3 0586531.2CNIPA design patent for the CL04 clip light, granted 7 Apr 2026. The CL05 has its own grant, ZL 2025 3 0572189.0, shown next.

![Chinese design patent ZL 2025 3 0572189.0 for the LX-CL05 travel light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cn-design-cl05.jpg)

 Granted patentCN ZL 2025 3 0572189.0CNIPA design patent for the LX-CL05 travel light, filed 25 Sep 2025, grant announced 3 Apr 2026 as CN 309894646 S. Patentee: Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics (深圳市拓迪电子有限公司).

![Chinese design patent ZL 2023 3 0560471.8 for the MC220 white noise speaker](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cn-design-mc220.jpg)

 Granted patentCN ZL 2023 3 0560471.8CNIPA design patent for the MC220 white-noise speaker, granted 27 Feb 2024, 15-year term from filing.

![Chinese design patent ZL 2024 3 0399660.6 for the MC-550 nursery lamp](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cn-design-mc550.jpg)

 Granted patentCN ZL 2024 3 0399660.6CNIPA design patent for the MC-550 nursery lamp, granted 17 Jan 2025.

## Battery-cell documents supplied with the MC330 files

 These documents name battery-cell suppliers and accompany the MC330 product files. They cover the cell, not the finished MC330 product; MC330’s own EMC, radio and safety documents are listed earlier on this page.

![CE EMC Certificate of Conformity FTS20LC-3903E for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy battery cells](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-ce-emc.jpg)

 Lab attestationCE / EMC — FTS20LC-3903EGuangdong Future Test Services (FTS) issued this EMC Directive 2014/30/EU certificate on 9 Dec 2020 to Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd, no expiry printed. It lists an 18500-1200mAh and 18500-1400mAh cell among a wider size range; it does not list the 1500 mAh cell.

![India BIS registration licence R-41185965 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy battery cells](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-bis.jpg)

 Granted licenceIndia BIS — R-41185965Bureau of Indian Standards licence to IS 16046(Part 2):2018 / IEC 62133-2:2017, granted 5 Apr 2021 to Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd, originally valid to 4 Apr 2023. Lists 18500-1200mAh and 18500-1400mAh; not the 1500 mAh cell.

![India BIS renewal letter extending licence R-41185965 to 4 April 2025](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-bis-renewal.jpg)

 Granted licenceIndia BIS renewal — R-41185965BIS renewed the same licence on 7 Mar 2023, extending it to 4 Apr 2025. That renewal has now expired. If India BIS applies to the order, require a current licence matched to the cell and quotation before shipment.

![FCC test report FTS22CR-0813E for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy battery cells](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-fcc.jpg)

 Test reportFCC — FTS22CR-0813EFTS issued this FCC 47 CFR Part 15:2021 test report on 3 Mar 2022 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd, result Passed, no expiry printed. Lists 18500-1200mAh and 18500-1400mAh; not the 1500 mAh cell.

![UN 38.3 test report SZXH20221228UN01 cover page, applicant Shenzhen Xinhong Energy](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-un38-3.jpg)

 Test reportUN 38.3 — SZXH20221228UN01Guangzhou CPUP issued this UN 38.3 test report on 10 Jan 2023 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd, XH 18500 cell, no expiry printed. One of the papers a freight forwarder asks for before booking a shipment; results on the next page.

![UN 38.3 test report SZXH20221228UN01 results page for the XH 18500 3.7V 1500 mAh 5.55Wh cell](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-un38-3-results.jpg)

 Test reportSZXH20221228UN01 — resultsSame report: XH 18500, 3.7V 1500mAh 5.55Wh, 18.2×49.0mm, 33.5g — Pass on every applicable UN 38.3 test.

![Stacking test report SZXH20221228DM01 cover page, applicant Shenzhen Xinhong Energy](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-stacking.jpg)

 Test reportStacking test — SZXH20221228DM01Guangzhou CPUP issued this UN Model Regulations 3 m stacking test report on 10 Jan 2023 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd, no expiry printed; results on the next page.

![Stacking test report SZXH20221228DM01 results page, Pass](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-stacking-results.jpg)

 Test reportSZXH20221228DM01 — resultsSame report: XH 18500 — Pass on the stacking test. The packing it was tested in is printed in the full report, available on request.

![1.2 m drop test report SZXH20221228D01 cover page, applicant Shenzhen Xinhong Energy](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-drop.jpg)

 Test report1.2 m drop test — SZXH20221228D01Guangzhou CPUP issued this UN Model Regulations 1.2 m drop test report on 10 Jan 2023 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd, no expiry printed; results on the next page.

![1.2 m drop test report SZXH20221228D01 results page, Pass](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-drop-results.jpg)

 Test reportSZXH20221228D01 — resultsSame packaged cells — Pass on the 1.2 m drop test.

![IECEE CB test certificate JPTUV-144042 listing the XH 18500 1500 mAh cell](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-cb-jptuv.jpg)

 Granted certificationCB certificate — JPTUV-144042TÜV Rheinland Japan issued this IECEE CB certificate to IEC 62133-2:2017+AMD1:2021 on 8 Feb 2023 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd, no expiry printed, covering 13 ratings from 600mAh to 2400mAh including the 1500 mAh cell.

![Korea KC confirmation letter CKC-2023-001280 for the XH 18500 2400 mAh battery](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-kc-declaration.jpg)

 Granted declarationKorea KC — CKC-2023-001280KTR recorded this KC 62133-2 (2020-07) confirmation on 23 Mar 2023 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd's XH 18500 2400mAh battery (basic model), no expiry printed.

![Attachment to CKC-2023-001280 listing derivative models including the XH 18500 1500 mAh cell](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-kc-declaration-models.jpg)

 AttachmentCKC-2023-001280 attachmentThe attachment page to the same declaration lists twelve derivative models from 600mAh to 2300mAh, including XH 18500 1500mAh — listed as a declared derivative of the 2400mAh basic model, not separately tested.

![IECEE CB test certificate KR-KTR-1322 for the XH 18500 2400 mAh battery pack](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-cb-kr-ktr.jpg)

 Granted certificationCB certificate — KR-KTR-1322KTR issued this IECEE CB certificate to IEC 62133-2:2017+AMD1:2021 (Korean national differences) on 7 Mar 2023 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd's XH 18500 2400mAh battery (1INR19/50 pack), backed by report KTR-2023-00004, no expiry printed. It certifies the wired pack, not the bare 1500 mAh cell on its own; the full test report, available on request, ties the pack's cell to certificate JPTUV-144042 above.

![China CCC certificate 2023010915593112 listing the 18500-1500mAh cell, holder Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-ccc.jpg)

 Granted certificationChina CCC — 2023010915593112China Quality Certification Centre (CQC) issued this GB 31241-2022 certificate on 7 Dec 2023 to Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology Co., Ltd (Huizhou) — a different company from the Shenzhen entity named on most of the documents on this page — valid to 6 Dec 2028. Lists 18500-1500mAh, 18500-1400mAh, 18500-1300mAh and 18500-1200mAh, including the 1500 mAh cell.

![Sea transport classification SZXH20240102JDS01 cover page, applicant Shenzhen Xinhong Energy](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-sea-transport.jpg)

 Test reportSea transport — SZXH20240102JDS01Guangzhou CPUP issued this sea-transport classification on 3 Jan 2024 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd. One of the papers a freight forwarder asks for; details on the next page.

![Sea transport classification SZXH20240102JDS01 results page for the XH 18500 1500 mAh cell, expired 31 December 2024](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-sea-transport-results.jpg)

 Test reportSZXH20240102JDS01 — detailsXH 18500 1500mAh cell, battery only, 200 per package; not restricted under IMDG special provision 188. Valid to 31 Dec 2024 — now expired. For a sea booking, require the freight forwarder to approve a current classification matched to the cell and shipment.

![Safety data sheet SZXH20240102MSDS01 cover page, applicant Shenzhen Xinhong Energy](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-msds.jpg)

 Safety data sheetMSDS — SZXH20240102MSDS01Guangzhou CPUP issued this safety data sheet on 3 Jan 2024 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd, no expiry printed. One of the papers a freight forwarder asks for; details on the next page.

![Safety data sheet SZXH20240102MSDS01 hazards and ratings page for the XH 18500 1500 mAh cell](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-msds-results.jpg)

 Safety data sheetSZXH20240102MSDS01 — hazardsRatings 3.7V, 1500mAh, 5.55Wh; "not dangerous with normal use", handling and exposure guidance for the XH 18500 cell.

![Air transport classification PEKGZ202401047990 for the XH 18500 1500 mAh cell, expired 31 December 2024](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-air-transport.jpg)

 Test reportAir transport — PEKGZ202401047990Beijing DGM classified the XH 18500 1500mAh cell as UN3480, Class 9, cargo aircraft only (passenger aircraft forbidden) on 4 Jan 2024, restating a UN 38.3 test summary for the same cell. Valid to 31 Dec 2024 — now expired. For an air booking, require the freight forwarder to approve a current classification matched to the cell and shipment.

![EU Battery Regulation Pb Cd Hg test report 18300RC40021501 cover page, holder Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-eu-battery-reg.jpg)

 Test reportEU Battery Regulation — 18300RC40021501Shenzhen Anbotek Compliance Laboratory reported this Pb/Cd/Hg test on 30 Jan 2024 for Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology Co., Ltd (Huizhou), no expiry printed. Details on the next page.

![EU Battery Regulation test report 18300RC40021501 detail page, tested model 14500-800, 18500 listed only as a reference size](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-eu-battery-reg-results.jpg)

 Test report18300RC40021501 — test detailTested to Regulation (EU) 2023/1542 Annex I, IEC 62321: complies. Test Model No. 14500-800; 18500 is listed only among many "Reference Model No." sizes, with no capacity given, so this report does not cover the 1500 mAh cell.

![ISO 9001 certificate 39323Q1756R0S for Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology, expired 22 August 2026](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-iso9001.jpg)

 Granted certificationISO 9001 — 39323Q1756R0SBeijing Zhonghuanzhian International Certification issued this GB/T 19001-2016 / ISO 9001:2015 certificate on 23 Aug 2023 to Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology Co., Ltd (Huizhou) for lithium battery Pack manufacture and sale, valid to 22 Aug 2026. That certificate has now expired. Names no specific cell or model.

![TUV Rheinland certificate US 72302376 01 to UL 1642 for Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology cells](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-ul1642.jpg)

 Granted certificationUL 1642 — US 72302376 01TÜV Rheinland of North America issued this certificate to UL 1642:2020 R10.22 on 20 Sep 2023 for Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology Co., Ltd (Huizhou), no expiry printed. This is a certificate to the UL 1642 standard, not a UL Listing, and it states the 15 listed models — including 18500-1200mAh and 18500-1400mAh, not the 1500 mAh cell — comply with all required tests except the impact test and the projectile test.

![High and New Technology Enterprise certificate GR202344204157, holder Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Industrial](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-hightech-enterprise.jpg)

 Granted certificationHigh and New Technology Enterprise — GR202344204157The Shenzhen Science and Technology Innovation Committee recognised Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Industrial Co., Ltd — a third company, distinct from the other two named on this page — as a High and New Technology Enterprise on 8 Dec 2023, valid three years from that date. Names no specific cell or model.

![RoHS test report HLF21005234C cover page, applicant Shenzhen Xinhong Energy, 20 May 2021](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-rohs.jpg)

 Test reportRoHS — HLF21005234CFLION Testing Technologies (CNAS L6093) issued this test report on 20 May 2021 for Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd, to RoHS 2011/65/EU and (EU) 2015/863, ten substances, conclusion Pass. The photographed test sample (page 6, next) is an XH ICR26650 5000mAh cell, not the 1500 mAh cell. The report itself states it is issued for the client’s research, teaching, internal quality control and product development — internal reference only. This is a test report, not a certificate.

![RoHS test report HLF21005234C sample photo, page 6, labelled XH ICR 26650 5000mAh 3.7V](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-rohs-sample.jpg)

 Test reportHLF21005234C — tested samplePage 6 of the same report: the photographed sample is labelled “XH ICR 26650 5000mAh 3.7V” next to the report number — the physical cell this report tested, not the 1500 mAh cell.

![RoHS test report HLF21005234C page 4, phthalate results and internal-reference condition](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-rohs-internal-use.jpg)

 Test reportHLF21005234C — internal-use conditionPage 4 of the same report: the phthalate results (all not detected) and the report’s own printed condition that it is issued for the client’s research, teaching, internal quality control and product development — for internal reference only.

![Product liability insurance policy 10528003902095520100, Ping An Property and Casualty Insurance, insured Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-liability-insurance.jpg)

 Insurance policyProduct liability insurance — 10528003902095520100Ping An Property & Casualty Insurance Company of China, Shenzhen Branch, issued this policy on 5 Jul 2023 to Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology Co., Ltd (Huizhou) — a different company from Tuodi — for the period 8 Jul 2023 to 7 Jul 2024. That policy has now expired. Total premium (tax included) RMB 56,000.

![Insurance policy 10528003902095520100 page 2, insured product battery generic, sales-region value table](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/docs/doc-cell-liability-insurance-scope.jpg)

 Insurance policy10528003902095520100 — insured product and sales regionsPage 2 of the same policy: the insured product is listed only as “battery”, generic — no cell model or Tuodi product is named. It prints the insured’s declared sales-region values for underwriting (RMB): other 1,000,000; Australia 3,000,000; Europe 4,000,000; North America 2,000,000; other Asia 2,000,000; Hong Kong/Macau/Taiwan 2,000,000; mainland China excluding Hong Kong/Macau/Taiwan 6,000,000 — the insured’s own declared figures, not a Tuodi sales record.

 Need the documents for your model and market? Send the model, configuration and destination. Ask on WhatsApp →

## Certificate and patent questions

 Does TUODI's CE-EMC certificate cover a 30 cm or custom-length TDL-6110X cabinet light bar?

 Certificate DLE-260814001C and its test report DLE-260814001R name the TDL-6110X only at 23, 40, 60, 80 and 90 cm; 30 cm and custom lengths are not named. Those documents do not establish coverage for an unlisted build. Before ordering for the EU, ask us to check how the manufacturer's conformity assessment, technical documentation and EU declaration of conformity cover your exact build. Do not assume a listed length's documents apply to another length.

 Does the Japan Giteki radio certificate R 219-248097 cover the exact MC550 variant I'm ordering?

 Not automatically. The Japan MIC type-based certificate R 219-248097, issued 29 April 2024, lists nine model codes, one of which is a plain "MC550" with no suffix. Every offered MC550 carries a suffix, BL, TIME or RF, and nothing in the certificate ties that bare code to any of them. Put the exact suffix on the quotation and require written confirmation that the document covers it or that a new test is needed.

 Is TUODI ISO 9001 certified?

 Only after a current certificate is supplied and matched to the order. Ask for the ISO 9001 certificate and confirm its holder, scope and validity. For UL or ETL, require the model-specific document tied to the quoted legal entity, exact model and destination. If a file is not named in the quotation's document set, do not use it for approval.

 Is TUODI's CE marking on sensor lights an independently certified mark, or is it self-declared?

 Self-declared. CE marking for EMC, and FCC Part 15B, work by supplier's declaration: TUODI declares conformity itself, backed by accredited-laboratory test reports, and no third party issues the marking. An example is the rechargeable cabinet-light CE-EMC certificate DLE-260814001C, valid only with its test report DLE-260814001R. A granted authorization such as FCC ID 2A8ZP-MC330 or Japan Giteki R 219-248097 is different: a certification body issues it.

 Which RoHS document actually covers the TDL-6110X rechargeable cabinet-light range — can I use the battery sensor-light RoHS certificate?

 No. RoHS certificate DLR-260814023C, dated 24 August 2026, names TDL-71xx battery models only, with no TDL-6110X and no TDL-6111, so do not cite it for the rechargeable range. For that range, RoHS test report DLR-260814022R names the same twenty model entries as EMC document DLE-260814001C, from TDL-6110X-IR to TDL-6108. It names no 30 cm or custom length, so ask whether a RoHS certificate covers your exact build before you rely on it.

 Notes

 Certification is model- and market-specific: a certificate belongs to a product, not to a factory as a whole. Each row of the scheme and document tables names a scheme and the document or label artwork shown for it, and a document covers only the models it names. Before ordering, request the complete current certificate or test report and match its model, holder, scope and destination market to the quotation.

 The quotation identifies the seller and legal manufacturer, and the applicable files can be supplied for model approval.

 If ISO 9001 or UL/ETL forms part of your approval, require the quotation to name the exact model, legal entity, document holder, number, scope and current validity. Until those files are supplied and matched, keep ISO and UL/ETL outside the approved document set. Rechargeable products also need a UN 38.3 battery transport summary matched to the SKU, cell and freight route before booking; the cells are certified separately at cell level (China CCC and IEC 62133-2 CB).

 TDL-2115: request the exact-build report and confirm its tested load, conditions and destination requirements before ordering.

 CE EMC and FCC Part 15B are self-declaration regimes backed by accredited test reports; those rows identify lab attestations, not regulatory grants. The FCC ID and Japan Giteki entries are granted regulatory authorizations. Documents dated 2021 to 2023 name Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics and are shown as earlier documents.

 Privacy-redacted previews omit handwritten signatures, the named contact on the FCC grants and the WeChat QR code in the DL Testing footer. Document numbers, holders, models, standards, dates, results and stamp dates remain visible as issued.

 Cabinet-light documents: a named family is not proof that every length, battery or component revision was assessed. Request the full document, including test report DLE-260814001R, and match it to the quotation. Neither DLE-260814001C nor DLR-260814022R lists a 30 cm or custom length; confirm applicability to the exact build and destination.

 Earlier documents (2021 to 2023): each applies to the sample and the models it lists; confirm your model and current build before you rely on one.

 Patents and designs: for the product you are evaluating, request the relevant registration and confirm its holder, territory, product views, scope, current validity and term.

 Design registrations protect the housing, not the electronics. Before relying on one, confirm that the current registration, holder, territory, product views, scope, validity and term cover the design you intend to buy or sell.

 MC330 cell documents: nothing in them names Tuodi or any Tuodi model, and the cell used in a given build is confirmed on the quotation, not by these documents alone. MC330’s specification states a 1500 mAh battery; these documents do not say which cell any particular build carries. Three different companies hold them — Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Co., Ltd, Guangdong Xinhong Energy Technology Co., Ltd (Huizhou) and Shenzhen Xinhong Energy Industrial Co., Ltd — and each caption names the holder printed on that document; they are not one supplier.

 Only the CB certificate JPTUV-144042 and the CCC certificate shown above list the 1500 mAh cell. The CE, BIS, FCC and UL 1642 documents stop at 1400 mAh, the RoHS test report's own tested and photographed sample is a 26650 cell, and the EU Battery Regulation test was run on a smaller 14500 cell — none of those documents cover the 1500 mAh cell. Before booking, require the freight forwarder to approve a current UN 38.3 report, transport classification and safety data sheet matched to the cell and exact build; the expired sea and air classifications shown on this page cannot support a current shipment. The product liability insurance policy shown above insures the cell supplier's generic “battery” product, not Tuodi or any Tuodi product.

 Cell documents: Privacy-redacted previews omit handwritten signatures, personal contact or signing names, phone numbers and email addresses. Document type, holder, issuer, number, standard, dates, cell scope and result remain visible as issued.

 These cell-level documents are supplementary to the finished-product certification set above. A cell certificate does not certify the assembled MC330 product; MC330's own EMC, radio and safety documents are listed earlier on this page.

 If a model is not certified for your market, treat it as uncertified until the required route is complete. A lab quote is not a certificate. Older documents name Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd.; newer ones may name Guangdong Tuodi Electronics in Zhaoqing. The certificate holder, legal manufacturer for the quoted model and seller on your invoice can therefore be different names. Orders can use the factory as seller of record or an arrangement coordinated by RyanFulfil. The quotation must identify the seller, invoice issuer and document holder for the exact model and destination before you commit.

========================================================================
# Dusk-to-Dawn Photocell Switch Manufacturer | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/photocell-dusk-to-dawn-switches/
Summary: Cord-mounted dusk-to-dawn photocell switches from TUODI: GK-AC-220V (600 W, IP66 factory marking, not third-party tested) and compact TDL-2086CDS.

Home › Sensor Switches › Photocell Dusk-to-Dawn Switches

## Photocell (Dusk-to-Dawn) Switches

 Cord-mounted light-level switches with an inline plug and socket: the lamp turns on at dusk and off at dawn with no wiring work. Built for sign and billboard installers, street and garden lighting contractors, and insect-killer distributors who need automatic operation on existing plug-in fixtures.

![TUODI GK-AC-220V dusk-to-dawn photocell switch, transparent housing showing the sensing board and flying leads](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/gk-ac-220v-hero.jpg)

## GK-AC-220V Dusk-to-Dawn Switch, 600 W

 For street lights, courtyard lights and insect killers, the applications the factory lists. It is described with high sensitivity, strong anti-interference, and delayed light-sensing to ride through brief light changes.

 Operating voltage | 85–277 V AC

 Load | 600 W

 Switching thresholds | ON below 5 lux · OFF above 15 lux

 Standby draw | < 0.2 W

 Ingress marking | IP66, the factory's own marking, not third-party tested

 Working temperature | −10 °C to +35 °C

 Size | 83 × 54 × 28 mm

 Do not rely on the IP66 marking where water could reach a live fitting; tell us whether the switch sits under an eave, inside a sign box or fitting, or fully weather-exposed, and we can quote independent testing of this model.

 Ask about GK-AC-220V

![TUODI TDL-2086CDS photocell switch, dark-on light-off](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-2086cds-hero.jpg)

 The China GB plug shown is the standard cord set; EU, UK, US and other market plugs are fitted to order and quoted with your order.

## TDL-2086CDS Compact Photocell Switch

 The compact economy version for garden and street lighting. Same automatic dark-on / light-off behaviour in a smaller shell. (Not to be confused with the PIR-sensing TDL-2086, which shares the same housing.)

 Operating voltage | 85–277 V AC

 Load | 300 W

 Switching thresholds | ON below 10 lux · OFF above 30 lux

 Standby draw | < 0.5 W

 Working temperature | −10 °C to +35 °C

 Size | 67 × 53 × 48 mm

 Ask about TDL-2086CDS

 Plugs for your market: both models ship on a Chinese GB 2-pin plug as standard. For EU, UK, US and other export markets the cord set is changed to your market's plug as part of the order; specify the destination and we quote accordingly.

 Related: all sensor switches countdown timer switches buyer FAQ

 Notes

 GK-AC-220V: for a 600 W load, check the switch against your installation conditions. The IP66 marking is declared by the factory, and no independent ingress test exists for this model. The sealed housing is designed for street and courtyard lighting, but the marking does not establish tested IP66 performance. Confirm protection for the actual exposure, or specify a housing with a test report behind it.

 Read every IP number on this site the same way: without a named test report beside it, it is a manufacturer's marking, not a tested rating.

========================================================================
# Countdown Timer Switch Manufacturer | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/countdown-timer-switches/
Summary: TUODI TDL-2116 three-step and TDL-2115 16-step DIP countdown timer switches: 86-type plates with a 16 A relay for charging bays, laundries and stairwells.

Home › Sensor Switches › Countdown Timer Switches

## Countdown Timer Switches

 86-type wall plates that run a load for a set time and then stop: set-and-forget shutoff for EV and e-bike charging bays, laundry rooms, stairwell lighting and bathroom fans. Property managers buy these to stop "left it on all night" energy waste and to cap unattended charging time. These are timers, not protection devices — they end the charging window, and no fire-safety claim is made for them.

![TUODI TDL-2116 countdown timer switch button operation and three timing ranges](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-2116-timers.jpg)

## TDL-2116 Three-Step Countdown Timer

 One button, three time steps, relay-switched. Tap within five seconds of starting to cycle the time selection; long-press until the indicators go out to cancel. Ordered with one of three factory timing options to suit the application.

 Operating voltage | 100–265 V AC

 Load | 16 A relay (factory sheet)

 Timing ladders (choose at order) | 15/30/60 min · 30/60/120 min · 2/4/6 h

 Working temperature | −20 °C to +50 °C

 Size / terminals | 86 × 86 × 29 mm · L-IN / L-OUT / N

 Ask about TDL-2116

![TUODI TDL-2115 timer switch rear with DIP selector, 240VAC 16A max marking](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-2115-rear.jpg)

## TDL-2115 16-Step DIP-Selectable Timer

 For installers who want the run time fixed at commissioning: a DIP bank on the rear fixes the duration, so users can start it but not change it. A locator lamp glows when the load is off, so the switch is findable in a dark stairwell.

 Rated voltage | 240 V AC

 Relay | 16 A high-power relay control

 Maximum load | 3500 W (factory manual)

 Time selection | DIP-set; ask for the current timing table (see note)

 Working temperature | −10 °C to +50 °C

 Dimensions | 86 × 86 × 30 mm

 Marking | Moulded 240 V AC, 16 AMP MAX

 Indicator | Locator light: on when load is off

 The factory manual and the rear moulding both rate this switch at 240 V AC. The manual shows two timing ranges (2 min–2 h in the rating table, 8–480 min on the DIP diagram). Ask for the current timing table with your quotation before you specify the switch.

 Ask about TDL-2115

## TDL-2115 applications and test documents

 TDL-2115 is offered for timing water heaters, extractor fans, fans, mosquito-repellent lamps and electric-vehicle charging equipment. Tell us the appliance or charger load, starting current and whether the timer switches it directly or operates an external contactor; the circuit brief below lists what to send.

 TDL-2115 has internal test reports only; no certification-body certification is available. See the model-specific document status.

 Built for 86 × 86 mm back boxes, standard across China, Southeast Asia and much of the Middle East. They do not fit EU 60 mm round or North American rectangular boxes; tell us your market and we will advise the right format.

## For water heaters and other high-load equipment, specify the circuit—not only the time

 Send the circuit with the order. A two-hour timer can still fail at installation if you and the supplier mean different things by neutral, relay load or power-loss behaviour. The TDL-2116 has L-IN, L-OUT and N terminals; that does not by itself mean a switched neutral or double-pole output. Use the brief below before specifying either timer for a heater, charger, fan or other high-inrush load.

 Field | Put on the quotation and wiring review | Before installation

 Neutral path | Whether N only powers the electronics/indicator or is actually switched; single-pole or double-pole isolation; terminal diagram and conductor sizes. | Approved wiring diagram for the exact revision and local isolation requirement—never infer “switchable neutral” from an N terminal.

 Real load | Load type, steady current, starting/inrush current, power factor and expected switching cycles—not only the nameplate watts. | Switch the intended load or a representative test load; inspect temperature and relay behaviour over repeated cycles.

 Contactor interface | Whether the timer switches the load directly or controls an external contactor; coil voltage/current and suppression method if one is used. | Qualified electrical review of separation, enclosure, protection and fail-safe state.

 Timing & restart | Exact timing ladder/firmware, start-cancel logic, indicator state, and what happens after a power cut or rapid power cycling. | Time every setting on the approved sample and check the restart state after an outage.

 Related: all sensor switches photocell switches OEM sensor modules

 Notes

 TDL-2115 test documents: request the internal report for the exact build and check its tested load and conditions against your project. Internal testing does not establish approval for your destination market. For North American, European and Asia-Pacific projects, confirm the destination requirements, mounting format and exact build before ordering.

 Installation boundary: the circuit brief helps select and order the device; it is not an electrical design approval. Mains wiring, protective devices, contactor selection and local code compliance belong with a qualified professional in the destination market.

========================================================================
# OEM PIR Modules & Low-Voltage Cabinet Controls | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/oem-sensor-modules/
Summary: PIR retrofit modules, a 12 V-to-mains relay interface, and low-voltage touch, door and proximity controls from TUODI for lighting and cabinet OEMs.

Home › Sensor Switches › OEM Sensor Modules

## OEM Sensor Modules & Retrofit Interfaces

 The components behind TUODI's own fixtures, available to lighting brands and cabinet makers who want to add sensing to an existing product: a screw-in PIR probe module for existing luminaires, a mains relay interface for 12 V sensor logic, and a family of 5–24 V DC in-cabinet sensor accessories. Confirm the selected module's mounting, housing clearance, supply, load and wiring requirements; integration and any tooling changes are reviewed for your project.

 Planning furniture lighting? See low-voltage touch, door and proximity controls.

 Quote modules on WhatsApp Build a module or control brief Describe supply, actual load, output and mounting requirements.

![TUODI TDL-2012-AJ PIR retrofit module with remote screw-in probe](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-2012aj-module.jpg)

## TDL-2012-AJ Retrofit PIR Module with Remote Probe

 Adds human sensing to an existing wall, balcony or glass fixture: drill an 18 mm hole, screw in the thread-mounted probe, and the compact board does the switching. Designed for corridor lights, wall lamps and simple luminaires that were never built with sensing.

 Working voltage | 220 V AC

 Maximum load | 200 W

 Detection | 3–5 m, 140° cone

 Delay | Six steps, selectable on the board: 15 s · 30 s · 1 min · 3 min · 5 min · 30 min

 Standby draw | 0.055 W (220 V AC)

 Probe installation | Threaded probe, 18 mm drill hole

 Board size / colour | 58 × 42 × 13.5 mm · white

 Ask about TDL-2012-AJ

![TUODI TDL-2201 relay interface kit with harness and manual](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-2201-kit.jpg)

## TDL-2201 12 V-to-Mains Relay Interface

 Lets a low-voltage sensor switch a mains load: 500 W relay interface with a built-in 12 V / 150 mA auxiliary supply to power the sensor itself. A DIP selects active-high or active-low input logic; factory-named companion boards are the TDL-LC1620, TDL-LC16M-IR and TDL-LC12B-IR. Boxed with contactor, manual, 4-pin adapter lead and screws.

 Operating voltage | 100–240 V AC

 Rated load | 500 W

 Auxiliary output | 12 V / 150 mA (1.8 W) for the sensor

 Input logic | Active-high / active-low, DIP-selected

 Size / weight | 100 × 45 × 12 mm · 50 g

 Environment | Not waterproof — indoor use

 Ask about TDL-2201

## Low-voltage cabinet controls

 For furniture and display-case builders, the current in-cabinet accessory range includes recessed touch switches in aluminium housings, door-open/door-close controls, ultra-slim adhesive microwave sensors and wardrobe-door proximity switches.

 Control type | Supply and details

 Ultra-slim adhesive microwave sensors | 5–24 V accessory range; ask for the current model-specific sheet.

 Wardrobe-door proximity switches | 6–24 V accessory range; ask for the current model-specific sheet.

 Touch and door-open/door-close controls | Code, voltage, wiring and compatibility matched to your build.

 Current accessory codes include TDL-LC1617-TC, TDL-LC1617-GIR, TDL-5028WB and TDL-5019M. Ask us to match a code to the control type, voltage and wiring you need. Request the DC accessory list →

## TDL-2012-AJ and TDL-2201 compared

Choose the TDL-2012-AJ for a retrofit PIR probe or the TDL-2201 for a low-voltage-to-mains relay interface.

 Decision | TDL-2012-AJ | TDL-2201 | Send with your enquiry

 Published role | Retrofit PIR module with a remote threaded probe for an existing luminaire. | Relay interface that lets low-voltage sensor logic switch a mains load. | Whether this role fits the actual luminaire, sensor and destination requirements.

 Supply and output | 220 V AC; 200 W maximum load. | 100–240 V AC; 500 W rated load; 12 V / 150 mA auxiliary sensor output. | Actual load, input logic, wiring route and the selected sensor/driver combination.

 Mounting / interface | Threaded probe; 18 mm drill hole; board is 58 × 42 × 13.5 mm. | Active-high or active-low input selected by DIP; 100 × 45 × 12 mm; indoor, not waterproof. | Clearances, enclosure, terminals, harness and any accessory-code mapping.

 Related: OEM / ODM process all sensor switches choosing a sensing technology

 Notes

 Confirm voltage, load and delay figures for the exact revision on your quotation and wiring diagram. Specifications and compatibility of the DC cabinet accessories are confirmed per order.

 Published specifications identify these products, but do not establish a document match for every ordered build. No promise is made for compatibility, spare availability, accessory-code mapping or an unlisted installation.

========================================================================
# 5.8 GHz Microwave Sensor Switch Manufacturer | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/microwave-sensor-switches/
Summary: Compare TUODI TDL-1915 and TDL-2076WB 5.8 GHz microwave radar sensor switches, including detection, delay and daylight settings.

Home › Sensor Switches › Microwave Radar Switches

## Microwave Radar Sensor Switches — 5.8 GHz, ceiling and inline

 Doppler radar detects movement from reflected radio waves rather than body-heat contrast. That makes radar useful where PIR performance is affected by temperature or where the sensor must be concealed; through-panel behaviour and nuisance triggering depend on the selected model, sensitivity, surrounding material and placement.

 Get a radar-switch quote on WhatsApp

![TUODI TDL-1915 microwave sensor switch, surface-mounted ceiling puck, front and side view](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-1915-hero.jpg)

## TDL-1915 5.8 GHz Ceiling Sensor Switch

 A surface-mounted ceiling puck for corridors, stairwells, bathrooms and back-of-house areas, switching the luminaire circuit directly. What makes it worth specifying over a fixed-parameter switch is that all three commissioning variables — how far it reaches, how long it holds, and how dark it has to be before it will act — are set on the unit itself, so one part number covers a lift lobby, a mid-corridor run and a service stair.

 Frequency | 5.8 GHz Doppler microwave

 Operating voltage | AC 85–250 V

 Detection range | 2–16 m, adjustable

 Delay / hold time | 8 seconds – 12 minutes, adjustable

 Daylight threshold | 2–2000 lux, adjustable

 Standby power | 70 mW

 Transmitting power | < 10 mW

 Dimensions | 94 × 94 × 45 mm

 Current rating | 10 A (2026 catalogue)

 Manufacturer load limits | LED ≤150 W · incandescent ≤800 W · exhaust fan ≤200 W

 Radio certification | None held for this model; testing for your market must be scoped before import

 Adjustment | Three rotary trimmers on the unit

 Tell us the LED driver or exhaust-fan type and its starting current; other motors, transformers and capacitive loads need a separate suitability check.

 Ask about TDL-1915

![TDL-1915 rotary adjusters: induction distance 2–16 m, delay 12 min to 8 s, ambient brightness daytime to night](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-1915-adjusters.jpg)

![TDL-1915 detection pattern: approximately 8 m radius below the ceiling, and 1–2 m through a wall](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-1915-range.jpg)

![TUODI's own TDL-1915 product information sheet listing dimensions, voltage, standby and transmitting power, frequency, induction distance, delay time and ambient brightness, with the load row masked](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-1915-specs.jpg)

 The factory's TDL-1915 product sheet, with its ambiguous load row masked. Inductive and LED-driver loads are stated on your quotation.

## Through-wall detection

 The factory's own range diagram shows the detection field it wants you to plan around — roughly an 8 m radius hemisphere from the ceiling down to the floor — and then, separately, that the field extends approximately 1–2 m through a wall, varying with the sensitivity setting.

 Through-wall detection is the reason radar can be concealed above a plasterboard soffit or behind a diffuser and still work, which no PIR switch can do. It is equally the reason a unit commissioned at full sensitivity in a small bathroom can be triggered by someone walking past in the corridor outside, and the room light will appear to switch itself on for nobody.

 What to do about it: specify the sensitivity setting per room type at order stage, not per project, and have the installer prove the boundary by walking the far side of every wall before signing the room off. If the layout puts a busy circulation route directly behind a small enclosed room, use PIR there and keep radar for the open runs.

## Choosing between the two

 Radar suits warm corridors, stairwells and plant areas; sensors that must be hidden inside or behind a fitting; and spaces where PIR range has visibly collapsed in summer.

 PIR suits small enclosed rooms with traffic on the other side of a partition, and any space where you need detection to stop hard at the wall line.

 Neither reliably holds a light on for someone completely still. For that you need presence sensing: TUODI's 2026 catalogue lists a 24 GHz presence range (see the switch hub), not yet radio-certified. Ask early if your project needs it.

 The full comparison, including hand-wave, is in the PIR vs radar vs hand-wave guide.

## Comparing 5.8 GHz switches

 Housing shape and headline range do not tell you how a radar switch behaves beside another unit, with a fan running, behind a panel or on a real LED driver. Convert every construction or “better quality” statement into a repeatable sample or production check:

 Sample and production checks for radar switches

 Area | Ask the supplier to state | Check on the intended build

 Detection field | Range/angle at the target mount height, sensitivity steps and through-panel/wall behaviour. | Walk the room boundary at minimum and maximum settings, including the far side of partitions.

 Adjacent units | Recommended spacing, channel/algorithm behaviour and maximum layout already tested. | Run several units together and watch for staggered switching, chatter or one unit triggering another.

 Nuisance triggers | Known response to fans, airflow, machinery, doors, vibration and small incidental motion. | Operate those sources in the real room while logging false-on and false-off events.

 Output & load | Relay or dry-contact output, actual lamp/driver type, inrush/derating and any protection or snubber provided. | Switch the intended driver/load repeatedly; record heat, relay chatter and state after power loss.

 Settings | Exact distance, delay, daylight and re-trigger logic for the supplied firmware/revision. | Measure each setting across several samples rather than accepting the printed knob scale alone.

 Environment & documents | Operating limits, ingress test reports, production checks and the issued model/market documents. | Put test limits, lot sample plan, report format and remedy on the order; a proposed certificate route is not coverage.

## Also in the microwave range

## TDL-2076WB

 A compact plug-through 5.8 GHz microwave switch for indoor lighting control. Its six sensitivity steps run from 50% to 100%; maximum published coverage is 8 m through 360°. Four delay selections — 3, 15, 30 or 60 seconds — and an on/off light-control setting are selected by DIP switches. Continuous re-triggering keeps the load on while motion continues.

 Operating voltage | 85–277 V AC

 Load | Incandescent ≤1200 W; CFL / energy-saving or fluorescent ≤600 W; LED ≤150 W

 Detection | Up to 8 m; 360°; six sensitivity steps from 50% to 100%

 Delay | 3 / 15 / 30 / 60 s

 Static current | <0.3 mA

 Working temperature | −10 to +35 °C

 Dimensions | 67 × 56 × 31 mm

 Ingress | IP54 housing marking, factory self-declared, not third-party tested; indoor use only

## TDL-7158WB-T

 A 10 GHz hand-wave toggle rather than an occupancy switch: it installs inline on a T5/T8 batten cord and switches on a deliberate hand movement under 30 cm, so it works with wet or greasy hands. See hand-wave switches.

 Indoor products. The TDL-2076WB and TDL-2086 carry an IP54 marking; it is the factory's own marking, not a third-party test, and the factory does not recommend either model outdoors.

 Certification by project. No CE/RED, RoHS or FCC document is on file for the switch range; for the TDL-1915, CE/RED can be quoted as project work. Tell us the destination before ordering.

 Fitting and datasheets. The TDL-1915 is a surface-mounted ceiling unit, not an 86-type back-box plate, so it does not depend on your market's box standard. Ask for the wiring diagram and electrical sheet for your model with the quotation. Request datasheets on WhatsApp →

 Related: all sensor switches PIR vs radar vs hand-wave guide hotel & corridor lighting product finder buyer FAQ

 Notes

 TDL-1915 load: the catalogue's 10 A current rating does not establish suitability for every appliance. Confirm the LED driver or exhaust-fan type, starting current and any required derating in writing on the quotation, and the exact load and starting current before ordering.

 Commissioning: confirm the installation boundary on the sample before specifying radar. If unwanted switching occurs, reduce the distance setting to suit the room and repeat the boundary test before accepting the installation.

 Certification: no FCC ID is currently available for the TDL-1915. A lab quote or timeline is not a certificate; treat only an issued document naming the exact model as coverage.

 Ingress markings: read every IP number on this page the same way. Without a named test report beside it, it is a manufacturer's marking, not a tested rating.

========================================================================
# Hand-Wave Touchless Switch Manufacturer | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/hand-wave-touchless-switches/
Summary: TUODI TDL-7158WB-T inline hand-wave switch for T5/T8 battens: plug-through installation, under-30 cm sensing and touchless operation.

Home › Sensor Switches › Hand-Wave Touchless Switches

## Hand-Wave Touchless Switches for T5/T8 Battens

 A switch that drops inline between a T5/T8 batten and its supply cord on standard figure-8 (C7/C8) tails: no wiring, no back box, plug-compatible with batten fittings worldwide. Wave a hand under it to toggle the light without touching a switch with wet or greasy hands. Tell us the connector and load for your cabinet or wardrobe installation.

![TUODI TDL-7158WB-T hand-wave switch toggling a cabinet light from under 30 cm](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-7158wbt-hero.jpg)

## TDL-7158WB-T Inline Hand-Wave Toggle

 Wave once for on, wave again for off: a deliberate toggle, not a timer, using 10 GHz microwave sensing per the factory datasheet, which works even with wet or oily hands. The male connector goes to the load, the female to the supply; installation is plugging two cords together.

 Operating voltage | 100–240 V AC

 Load | 300 W (5 A relay)

 Sensing | Hand-wave, effective under 30 cm

 Behaviour | Wave to toggle on/off (no auto-off timer)

 Connectors | Figure-8 C7/C8 inline: male → load, female → supply; fits T5/T8 batten sockets

 Working temperature | −10 °C to +35 °C

 Size / housing | 88 × 32 × 22 mm · flame-retardant ABS

 Ask about TDL-7158WB-T

 Built for cabinet and wardrobe fitters retrofitting batten lighting over worktops, and distributors serving them. Hand-wave operation keeps wet or greasy hands away from the control surface.

 Related: all sensor switches sensor cabinet lights PIR vs radar vs hand-wave

========================================================================
# Sensor Lighting Market Brief 2026-2027 | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/sensor-lighting-market-brief/
Summary: 2026 public-company signals for sensor choice, inventory risk, order staging, connectivity and serviceability. Limited context, not a forecast.

Home › Market Brief 2026–2027

## Sensor lighting market brief: what buyers should prepare for in 2027

 This brief turns recent company and technology developments into sourcing questions for importers, distributors, furniture manufacturers, project buyers and private-label brands. It is not a market-size or growth-rate forecast.

 How to use the market signals. These are direction signals from adjacent public companies, not a market-size or growth-rate forecast for rechargeable cabinet lights. None of these businesses is a comparable to this factory: their scope, accounting and customer mix all differ. Use these figures to frame sourcing questions; they do not establish a sensor-light market growth rate. The figures are reproduced from each company's own published release solely to reason about sourcing decisions. Nothing here is investment advice or a view on any company's prospects or securities.

## The short answer

 The market is not moving in one direction. Basic lighting hardware is getting harder to differentiate, while controls, intelligent-space systems and professional project work show better momentum. At the same time retailers and brands are managing inventory cautiously — so factory orders can weaken while end customers are still buying. For a buyer, the useful response is not to chase features. It is to choose the right sensing technology for the application, cut inventory risk, confirm serviceability, and build a replenishment path that can react.

## Start with the buying job

 The same product can be a good fit for one buyer and a poor fit for another. Start with one of these five decision routes:

 Buyer | Decision to optimise | Best place to start

 Furniture / wardrobe | Mounting, sensor behaviour, charging access, replacement and repeatable dimensions. | Furniture integration guide

 Distributor / importer | Entry–mid–premium range logic, inventory turn, pilot size and repeat-order control. | Product Finder and pricing guide

 Hotel / project | Installation disruption versus ongoing charging, spares, sample-room proof and lifecycle cost. | Hotel and corridor guide

 Private-label brand | Differentiation without uncontrolled tooling, claims, certification or packaging risk. | OEM / ODM project path

 Engineer / integrator | Load compatibility, sensing logic, power, radio route, revision and exact document scope. | Sensor comparison and OEM modules

## Seven market signals for sourcing choices

 The examples below raise useful sourcing questions. They are not a league table and do not make unlike businesses directly comparable.

 Company | 2026 signal | What it does not prove

 Signify
Q2 2026, 24 Jul | Comparable sales −3.6%. Professional projects had momentum in the US and emerging markets. Connected consumer products sold through strongly, but sell-in was held back by retailers adjusting inventory. | Not a cabinet-light market size. The sell-out/sell-in split is the valuable part.

 Acuity
FQ3 2026, 25 Jun | Conventional lighting sales −1.9%; Intelligent Spaces +14.9%, at a 25.1% adjusted operating margin against 18.2% for lighting. | Intelligent Spaces also covers building management and AV control — not a sensor-light growth rate.

 Legrand
H1 2026, 29 Jul | Organic sales +9.8%, adjusted operating margin 20.8%, with growth concentrated in energy and digital-transition markets. | Datacentres and acquisitions drive much of this. Not comparable to furniture lighting.

 Tuya
Q2 2026 | PaaS +16.9%, smart-home and robot products +23.2% — but hardware gross margin 21.9% against 46.8% for PaaS. Semiconductor pricing pressured margins. | That connected demand exists does not mean connected hardware is profitable for the maker.

 Xiaomi
H1 2026 | IoT and lifestyle revenue −19.2% and gross margin down to 20.1%, while connected devices grew 17.4% and overseas IoT revenue grew quickly. | Installed base and revenue can move in opposite directions. Not evidence that overseas smart-home demand has gone.

 Home Depot
Q2 FY2026, 18 Aug | Comparable sales +1.7%; customers doing smaller projects; transactions −1.0% while average ticket rose 2.8%. | A US retail proxy, not a forecast for China-sourced cabinet lights.

 Lowe's
Q2 2026, 19 Aug | Comparable sales +0.2%, with strength in Pro, home services and online (+15.7%); discretionary DIY still under pressure. | Supports a Pro/B2B emphasis; says nothing about any one supplier's volumes.

## Questions these signals help you investigate
Whether professional and consumer demand are moving apart
Whether end customers are still buying while channel orders pause (sell-out versus sell-in)
Where value is migrating: controls, systems and services rather than bare hardware
How components, tariffs and channel inventory are moving orders

## What it cannot settle
The growth rate of the sensor-cabinet-light market
Whether any given SKU will sell
What premium buyers will pay
A supplier's true margin, defect rate or reorder rate

## Six sourcing decisions for 2027

 Judge suppliers on more than lumens and unit price. The value around lighting is accumulating in control behaviour, application fit, installation, servicing and documentation. Ask what a supplier knows about those, not just what it costs.

 Separate retail demand from distributor stocking. Signify's results separate strong consumer sell-through from weak sell-in caused by retailer destocking. If your own orders paused, work out which of those you are looking at before you change your assortment.

 Ask for flexibility, not only the lowest opening price. When channels are cautious, smaller pilots, mixed models, later-applied packaging and shorter repeat-order lead times reduce more risk than a few cents of unit cost. Cash tied up in the wrong variant is the expensive mistake.

 Buy connectivity for an outcome, not for the spec sheet. Tuya's own numbers show hardware margins far below platform margins. An app adds cost, support burden and a certification route. Pay for it when it delivers integration, diagnostics, automation or energy reporting — not because it sounds modern.

 Professional and project channels look steadier than discretionary DIY. If you integrate, specify or distribute repeatedly — furniture programmes, hotel retrofits, corridor and display lighting — you are in the part of the market that held up better.

 Ask what a price quote is exposed to. Component and tariff volatility appeared across these results. A supplier should be able to tell you quote validity, the main price drivers, which alternative components are approved, and which component changes would require re-testing.

## Do not jump from sample to scale

 A lower-risk order path has four gates. Each gate answers a different question and should have its own acceptance conditions.

 1 · Sample

## Does this exact configuration work?
Lock the model, sensing mode, power, finish and provisional documents. Agree what will be tested and what is still unknown.

 2 · Pilot

## Can the buyer launch without excess stock?
Test a limited first run. Ask whether models can be mixed and whether labels or private packaging can wait until demand is clearer.

 3 · Replenish

## Can the winner be repeated?
Confirm the unchanged specification, quote validity, repeat lead time, approved substitutions and the trigger for a new sample or document review.

 4 · Scale

## Is the programme ready for commitment?
Move to full packaging, forecasts or buffer stock only after the pilot proves sell-through, quality, servicing and operational response.

 This is a buyer-side control model, not a blanket factory promise. Mixed models, neutral stock, packaging timing, repeat lead time and buffer stock vary by model and order. Put each requested option on the quotation and production specification.

## When connected lighting earns its cost

 An app, radio or smart-home badge does not create value by itself. Before paying for connectivity, require five answers: a named user outcome; an owner for firmware and support; a destination-market radio route; a useful fallback when the network is unavailable; and enough commercial value to cover hardware, testing and after-sales burden. Connectivity is easier to justify for integration, remote configuration, diagnostics, multi-device coordination or energy reporting than for a product whose whole job is to turn on when a wardrobe door opens.

## Presence sensing: a premium tool, not the new default

 Millimetre-wave presence sensing detects fine movement and, in suitable designs, a person who is sitting still — the exact failure of ordinary motion sensing, where the light drops out because nobody moved. Texas Instruments and Infineon both position mmWave for occupancy and lighting control, and consumer products from Aqara, Meross and SwitchBot now combine PIR with mmWave, including battery formats.

 It is genuinely useful where stationary presence matters: offices, meeting rooms, bathrooms, reading areas, hotel rooms. It is usually unnecessary for a wardrobe or cabinet light that only needs to react when a door opens — and radar's ability to sense through panels is an active disadvantage inside furniture, because it triggers through the closed door.

 Include the complete system cost. Published 1,000-unit prices in the cited supplier material for some 57–64 GHz industrial radar devices were around US$11–16 — silicon alone, before the antenna, MCU, power management, enclosure, firmware tuning, certification and support. That is most of the selling price of a commodity cabinet light. Radio compliance depends on frequency, modulation, output, antenna and destination market, and using a pre-certified module does not automatically make the finished product compliant.

 Budget the compliance route, not just the part. Anything that transmits — radar and mmWave included — generally falls under radio-equipment rules in most markets, which is a materially longer and costlier route than the EMC file a non-transmitting light needs. On this range, sensor switches are not held in stock pre-certified. Project certification may be quoted only where a suitable route exists, and a lab quote is not an authorization. The Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915) has no radio certificate today. If your schedule assumes a certificate already exists, ask before you commit to a launch date — for any supplier, not just this one.

What we offer today. The published range uses PIR, microwave radar, hand-wave and photocell sensing — see the technology comparison. TUODI's 2026 catalogue also lists 24 GHz Presence Detection Switches and Modules (TDL-9952, TDL-9953, TDL-7159 and TDL-2076-EX) with model codes, frequency, detection distances and delay ranges, and we can send you those pages. None of it is radio-certified yet, and that is what decides your launch date: a transmitting sensor is radio equipment in most markets and needs a radio scheme, not a plain EMC file. If presence sensing is what your application needs, say so in your enquiry and we will tell you plainly whether we can serve it.

 Eight answers to get before you commit to presence sensing, from any supplier: a clear use case; an acceptable premium; stationary detection demonstrated on a sample, not claimed; false triggers controlled, and measured how; the power target met; a module supplier that can scale; a stated compliance route; and who owns the firmware and the test evidence.

## Serviceability is becoming a specification, not a nicety

 EU Regulation 2023/1542 applies from 18 February 2027 and generally requires portable batteries in products to be readily removable and replaceable by the end user, with defined derogations and exceptions, and requires compatible replacement batteries to remain available as spare parts for a stated minimum period. This page is not legal advice; determine scope, exemptions and product-specific obligations with a qualified compliance adviser before placing the product on the market.

 The commercial logic holds regardless of where the legal line falls. For hotels, rental and furniture programmes, a light whose battery can be swapped without unmounting the fixture cuts maintenance cost and warranty exposure, and creates a spare-parts line. Compare four architectures against your own numbers: sealed battery, removable light bar, removable battery card, and wired low-voltage. The right answer depends on how often the light is used, how many units you install, who maintains them and how long the programme is meant to last.

 Architecture | Lifecycle question | What to test on the sample

 Sealed battery | Will the whole unit be replaced when the battery degrades? | Runtime method, charging heat, low-battery behaviour and replacement policy.

 Removable light bar | Can the user remove and recharge or replace the bar without disturbing the furniture? | Clip or magnet retention, alignment, charging access and repeat availability.

 Removable battery / card | Can the power module be replaced while the installed light stays in place? | Tool access, connector wear, spare compatibility and safe replacement instructions.

 Wired low-voltage | Does removing charging work justify the cabling and installation access? | Driver location, cable route, voltage drop, service access and replacement parts.

## A sourcing checklist for 2027

 Before you choose a sensor-light supplier, get answers to these. They are the questions that decide whether an order goes well:

 1 | What exact application will the product serve?

 2 | Is PIR, conventional radar, mmWave presence, hand-wave or door sensing right for it?

 3 | Battery, replaceable-battery or wired — and who maintains it?

 4 | How will it be mounted, charged and serviced once installed?

 5 | What quantity do you need at sample, pilot and replenishment stages?

 6 | Which configurations can share components or packaging?

 7 | Which model-specific documents does your destination market require?

 8 | What changes trigger a new sample or a document review?

 9 | How fast can an unchanged product be replenished?

 10 | Who handles QC, shipping and after-sales when something goes wrong?

## Sources

 Sources include Signify Q2 2026 · Acuity fiscal Q3 2026 · Legrand H1 2026 · Tuya Q2 2026 · Xiaomi interim results · Home Depot Q2 FY2026 · Lowe's Q2 2026. Technology and regulation context includes Texas Instruments and Infineon sensing information, Matter 1.4 occupancy-sensing material, Regulation (EU) 2023/1542 and European Commission battery guidance. Figures use different periods, definitions and business mixes; use them as limited context, not direct market data or a forecast.

 Turn this into a decision. Tell us the application, the expected quantity, the destination market and how the product will be powered and maintained. Ask for a recommended sensing architecture and a sample path for those requirements. Describe your application on WhatsApp

 Related: all buyer insights serviceable sensor-lighting design sample-to-scale ordering choosing a sensing technology product finder quality comparison & testing specifying for furniture OEM / ODM

========================================================================
# Lighting Range Guide: TUODI, Weichun, Xiuben and iLamp
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/tuodi-vs-xiuben/
Summary: Compare TUODI furniture lighting, Weichun solar outdoor lights, Xiuben project luminaires and iLamp decorative strings by buyer brief.

Home › Buyer Guides › Lighting range comparison

## Which lighting range fits the buying brief?

 Start with TUODI International for cabinet and wardrobe sensor lights, separate sensor switches and OEM control modules; Weichun Lighting for solar pillar, street, wall or spike lights; Xiuben Lighting for project and commercial-area luminaires; and iLamp Technology for decorative outdoor strings. Choose the relevant product conversation, then compare exact configurations.

 Commercial relationship. We help promote TUODI International, Weichun Lighting, Xiuben Lighting and iLamp Technology. This is a comparison of their published ranges, not independent testing or a ranking of quality, price or performance.

## Match the buying job to a published range

 Use this comparison to choose the first conversation. A family match is not a finding of suitability or compatibility; availability, certification and terms are set on each quotation. On a small screen, scroll the table sideways.

 Published range and buyer-fit comparison
 Buying brief | TUODI International | Weichun Lighting | Xiuben Lighting | iLamp Technology

 Cabinet or wardrobe light | Cabinet sensor lights and wardrobe installation choices are the direct published range. | Outdoor solar fixtures are a separate package. | Project and area luminaires are a separate package. | Decorative outdoor lighting is a separate package.

 Separate sensing or control component | Separate switches and OEM sensor modules are the direct starting point; confirm the electrical interface. | Specify outdoor fixture controls only within the named product brief. | Specify project-luminaire controls within the selected configuration. | Specify the selected decorative string and control method together.

 Gate pillar, fence post or architectural post top | Furniture-lighting and control products answer a different brief. | Published solar and mains pillar lights are the direct range, with base widths from 100 mm to 500 mm. | Begin a garden or project-lighting discussion and confirm the exact mounting brief. | Landscape and garden lighting is adjacent; confirm the fixture and installation.

 Road, access route or commercial outdoor area | Keep furniture lighting or controls as a separate package. | Published solar street-light families are a direct starting point for a named road or area brief. | Published solar street, garden and flood families, plus commercial LED formats, are the project starting point. | Decorative strings do not establish a roadway-lighting configuration.

 Patio, café or hospitality ambience | Keep furniture lighting and sensing as a separate package. | Use a named pillar, wall or spike-light brief for architectural outdoor fixtures. | Keep site luminaires as a separately specified package. | Mains, solar and smart outdoor strings are the direct decorative-lighting starting point.

 First details to send | Furniture dimensions, mounting, supply, load, sensing behaviour, wiring and quantity. | Application, base width or road brief, material, solar or mains, quantity and destination. | Site layout, mounting, power or solar context, operating profile, quantity and destination. | Setting, run length, socket spacing, bulb look, plug or market, control and quantity.

## When TUODI is the direct starting point

 Begin with TUODI when the product must integrate into a cabinet, wardrobe or furniture system, or when the requirement is a separate sensing or control component. Define the furniture space, mounting and charging access for an integrated light. For a separate switch or module, define the supply, load, driver, wiring and required sensing behaviour.

## When Weichun is the direct starting point

 For a gate pillar, fence post or architectural post-top brief, begin with Weichun’s published pillar-light catalogue. Its published outdoor range also includes solar street, wall and spike lights. Confirm the post or site dimensions, material, solar or mains requirement, quantity and destination before shortlisting a model.

 Read Weichun’s solar-outdoor comparison and category links →

## When Xiuben is the project-luminaire starting point

 For a road, garden, yard, floodlighting or commercial-area brief, begin with Xiuben’s listed solar and commercial LED families. A project luminaire needs a site-based discussion: mounting positions, light distribution, operating profile, power arrangement and maintenance access.

 Read Xiuben’s project-lighting comparison and family links →

## When iLamp Technology is the decorative starting point

 For patio ambience, hospitality settings and decorative outdoor-lighting briefs, begin with iLamp Technology’s listed mains, solar or smart string-light families. Select the intended setting, power arrangement, plug or market, run length and exact configuration before asking for a quotation.

 Read iLamp Technology’s decorative-lighting comparison →

## Do not infer component compatibility

 An integrated sensor is part of a named light. A separate module is a component in a proposed circuit. Do not assume a TUODI module can connect to a chosen Weichun, Xiuben or iLamp Technology product. Confirm the exact interfaces, driver requirements and compatibility checks before specifying a combined system.

## Compare quotations on the same basis

 Name the configuration. Put the model, variant, supply, controls, finish and accessories on the quotation.

 Match documents to the item. Confirm the company, model or family, standard, date and destination relevance.

 Use a sample acceptance plan. Define installation, sensing or control behaviour, finish and pass/fail checks.

 Normalise the commercial basis. Compare quantity, included parts, seller, invoice issuer, production timing, shipping term and after-sales terms.

## A mixed project can need four separate packages

 A hospitality development might need solar entrance pillars, roadway luminaires, patio strings and wardrobe lighting. Treat them as four packages. Ask for a named model/configuration, sample route, document scope and quotation for each. A shared project does not establish shared components, compatibility, seller or order terms.

## Common comparison questions

 Which lighting factory is best?
This guide does not name an overall winner. It routes a buyer to a relevant published range. The actual decision still depends on the exact configuration, sample, evidence, destination requirements and quotation.

 How do Weichun and Xiuben differ for outdoor projects?
Weichun is a direct starting point for its deep published pillar-light catalogue and its listed solar street, wall and spike lights. Xiuben is a starting point for its broader published solar project and commercial-area luminaire families. Compare named products against the mounting, site and evidence requirements rather than comparing labels alone.

 Can a TUODI sensor module work with another factory’s light?
Do not assume so. Confirm the exact module code, supply, load, driver, interface, wiring and compatibility with the selected light before specifying a combined system.

 Can products from several ranges share one quotation?
Do not assume they can. Ask for each package separately and confirm the seller, invoice issuer, included items, documents and terms in writing.

 Start a TUODI furniture-lighting or control brief. Send the application, dimensions, supply, sensing behaviour, quantity and destination. Build a TUODI enquiry →

 Comparison basis: TUODI’s linked cabinet, wardrobe, switch and module pages; Weichun’s published pillar, solar street, wall and spike-light pages; Xiuben’s published solar and commercial project-lighting families; and iLamp Technology’s published mains, solar and smart string-light families. Confirm current models and order terms before purchasing.

 Related: sensor cabinet lights wardrobe lighting sensor switches OEM sensor modules RFQ checklist

========================================================================
# Sensor Lighting Insights for Buyers | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/insights/
Summary: Sensor-lighting insights for importers, brands, furniture makers and project buyers: technology choice, serviceability, staged orders, pricing, samples.

Home › Buyer Guides

## Sensor lighting insights for buyers and product teams

 Practical guidance for importers, private-label brands, furniture manufacturers, distributors, engineers and project buyers. Start with the decision you need to make—not a list of features.

 These guides shorten the path to a workable sample. Compare the real design and order choices, then carry the requirements into your RFQ.

## Three decisions that shape the programme

 Choose the application, lifecycle architecture and order path before comparing small differences in unit price.

![Sensor light bar illuminating a wardrobe shelf](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110-shelf.jpg)

 Market & channel

## Sensor lighting market brief 2026–2027

 Plan buyer routes, inventory risk, connectivity economics, serviceability and sourcing questions for 2027.

 Read the market brief

![Removable battery architecture inside a TUODI sensor light bar](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-battery-card.jpg)

 Lifecycle design

## Serviceable sensor lighting

 Compare sealed batteries, removable bars, replaceable battery modules and wired low-voltage systems by maintenance and lifecycle risk.

 Compare the architectures

![TUODI OEM and ODM development process](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/oem-odm-process.jpg)

 Order control

## From sample to scale

 Four buyer gates for proving the configuration, limiting launch risk, controlling repeat orders and deciding when to scale.

 Use the buyer checklist

## Technical and commercial guides

 Answers for the questions that usually appear between a product shortlist and a production order.

 Factory range comparison

## Which of four lighting ranges fits?
Compare furniture lighting and controls with solar pillars and street lights, project luminaires and outdoor decorative strings by buyer brief.
Compare the four ranges

 Technology choice

## PIR vs microwave radar vs hand-wave
Compare detection behaviour, false-trigger risks, battery implications and matching applications—with an interactive simulator.
Choose a sensor

 Commercial choice

## What drives a sensor light’s price
See how length, battery format, sensing type, included accessories, order size and customisation affect the quotation.
Understand the price

Quality comparison

## Why TUODI costs more
See the product images, factory-reported quality gap and build choices behind the Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915) and Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X).
Compare the quality

 RFQ preparation

## Questions to ask before you order
Build a quote-ready brief covering sensing, electrical loads, batteries, OEM, documents, packing, payment, delivery and sample acceptance.
Build a complete RFQ

 Furniture integration

## Wardrobe and closet lighting
Specify sensor placement, mounting, charging access, replacement and repeatable dimensions for furniture programmes.
Plan furniture lighting

 Project integration

## Hotel, corridor and staircase lighting
Compare retrofit formats, linked-light behaviour, servicing, installation disruption and model-specific documents.
Plan a project

 Product selection

## Find a TUODI platform
Filter the published range by category, sensing type, power and application before requesting a sample or quotation.
Open the Product Finder

 Need an answer for a live project? Send the application, expected quantity, destination market and preferred power format. The team can identify the questions that must be answered before a sample is made. Start an RFQ →

========================================================================
# Serviceable Sensor Lighting: Battery & Wiring Choices | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/serviceable-sensor-lighting-design/
Summary: Plan 2027 EU battery serviceability, spare ownership and instructions before comparing sealed, removable-module and wired sensor-light architectures.

Home › Buyer Guides › Serviceable Sensor Lighting

## Serviceable sensor lighting: choosing the battery and wiring architecture

 For furniture programmes, hotels, rental properties and private-label products, choose how the light is charged and serviced before you choose the light. The important question is not only “How long does the battery last?” It is “What happens when the product needs charging, servicing or replacement across the installed programme?”

 TUODI International buyer guide

![Diagram of a removable battery module used in a TUODI sensor light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-battery.jpg)

 A removable power module is one serviceability route. The right architecture still depends on access, maintenance responsibility and the expected programme life. The pictured 1800 mAh label is an illustration, not the capacity of the configurations below. Confirm battery capacity for your selected configuration.

 Short answer. Use a removable light bar when the user can take the fixture down for charging. Use a replaceable battery module when the installed bar should stay in place. Use wired low voltage when frequent operation and a long programme life justify cabling. A sealed battery can still suit low-cost, low-duty products—but the replacement plan needs to be explicit.

## EU-bound programmes: decide the service route before the design is fixed

 The European Commission's battery removability and replaceability guidance, published 14 July 2026, explains that Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2023/1542 applies from 18 February 2027. Products incorporating portable batteries can face end-user removal, replacement and spare-availability obligations. This is non-binding Commission guidance: applicability depends on the product and battery classification, relevant derogations and other product requirements. Check that scope for the exact design; a detachable or rechargeable format alone does not establish compliance. See the Commission guidance PDF, introduction and sections 2–5.

 For programme planning, give the following decisions an owner before approving tooling or packaging. This is a suggested purchasing workflow, not a complete legal checklist or a promise about any TUODI model.

 Decision | What to settle | Evidence and programme owner

 Scope and service user | Which requirements apply to this product and battery, and who must be able to perform each service task? | Product/compliance lead records the classification and any relied-on exception before design approval.

 Battery removal | Distinguish taking down the light for charging from removing its battery. Check access, tools and the installed furniture or mounting arrangement. | Engineering demonstrates the permitted removal sequence on the selected sample and records any damage or access problem.

 Battery replacement | Define a compatible replacement and verify fit, connection and operation after refitting. | Engineering and quality retain the replacement specification and observed sample result; do not approve from a connector photograph alone.

 Spare identification and instructions | Match the product reference, battery reference and safe replacement instructions so the user can identify the intended spare. | Product and service teams check labels and instructions together and keep a controlled copy for support.

 Availability and programme ownership | Confirm applicable spare obligations and agree who maintains supply, ordering access and compatibility when a component changes. | Procurement and the responsible programme lead record the supplier commitment, change-review trigger and service contact. A sample swap does not establish future supply.

## Four sensor-lighting architectures to compare

 Architecture | Strong fit | Main lifecycle risk | Sample question

 Sealed rechargeable battery | Low-duty consumer products where compactness and opening price dominate. | The whole unit may become the replacement item when the cell degrades or the charging path fails. | Can the battery or unit be replaced, and what happens to the mounting hardware?

 Removable light bar | Wardrobes, shelves and cabinets where magnetic or clipped mounting is easy to reach. | Repeated removal can disturb alignment, clips, adhesive plates or charging routines. | Can a normal user remove, charge and reinstall it without loosening the mount?

 Replaceable battery module | Serviced furniture, rental units and installations where the bar should remain mounted. | Future spare compatibility, connector wear and battery-module availability become programme requirements. | Can the module be changed safely, and how is the exact replacement identified?

 Wired low voltage | High-use hospitality, display, fitted-furniture and long-life projects with cable access. | Driver placement, voltage drop, cable routing and installation access can move cost from product to site. | Can the driver and connection points be reached without dismantling the installation?

## What “serviceable” means in a real installation

 Serviceability is a chain, not one feature. A replaceable battery is not useful if the connector is hidden behind a fixed panel. A removable bar is not convenient if the user needs a ladder every week. A wired system is not maintainable if the driver is sealed above a finished ceiling.

 Access: who can reach the light, battery, driver and connector after installation?

 Identification: can maintenance staff identify the correct spare without opening the product?

 Replacement: does servicing disturb furniture, paint, adhesive plates or wiring?

 Continuity: will the same spare, connector and mounting interface remain available for the programme?

 Instructions: can a normal user complete the permitted task without creating a safety or warranty problem?

## Choose by application, not by the newest feature

 Furniture retail

## Protect flat-pack simplicity
A removable magnetic bar avoids wiring and keeps installation simple. Check charging access, mounting retention and whether the replacement unit will fit the same plates.

 Hotel or serviced property

## Reduce maintenance touches
Multiply charging and replacement work by the number of rooms. A removable module or wired system can be worth more than a lower opening unit price.

 Rental and student housing

## Separate the fixture from the wear item
Where staff maintain many units, standardised spares and visible model identification reduce the chance of incompatible replacements.

 Private-label consumer line

## Define the end-of-life story
Packaging, instructions, warranty handling and spare availability should match the chosen architecture—not be written after the product is already fixed.

## What to test on the sample

 Do not test only brightness and sensor range. Run the complete maintenance action with the people who will actually perform it.

 Test | What to record

 Removal and refit | Time, tools, force, alignment and whether clips, magnets or adhesive plates move.

 Charging access | Cable clearance, indicator visibility, heat and whether the product can be used while charging.

 Battery or spare swap | Connector access, polarity protection, labelling, safe handling and the exact replacement code.

 Low-battery behaviour | Warning, dimming, sensor stability and whether settings are retained after power loss.

 Repeated handling | Wear after realistic removal, charging and reconnection cycles.

 Installed sensing | Trigger and shut-off behaviour with the real door, panel, mounting height and surrounding material.

## A worked comparison of the two published configurations

 The Detachable-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6111) lets the battery card be charged while the magnetic light section stays mounted. That shared architecture does not make the two published configurations interchangeable. Use the exact configuration reference, rather than a family average, when deciding whether the installed location can be serviced.

 Published TDL-6111 configuration fields for installed-service planningConfiguration reference | Configured span and composition | Light section dimensions | Power and output | Battery-card fields
TDL-6111 · 35 cm configured span
tdl-6111-35cm@3 | 35 cm configured span
25 cm light section plus 10 cm battery card | 250 × 38 × 9 mm | Power: 1.3 W
Tolerance: ±10%
Output: 136 lm | Battery capacity: —
LED count: —
Hold time: —
Separate replacement-card supply: —

TDL-6111 · 54 cm configured span
tdl-6111-54cm@3 | 54 cm configured span
40 cm light section plus 14 cm battery card | 400 × 38 × 9 mm | Power: 2 W
Tolerance: ±10%
Output: 208 lm | Battery capacity: 3000 mAh
LED count: 146 LEDs
Hold time: 15 s
Separate replacement-card supply: —
Values shown are factory specifications for each configured span; your quotation states the values for the build you select. Fields marked — : To be confirmed on your quotation.

 Before approving a drawing or purchase order, use the selected reference to settle installed clearance for removing the battery card, separate replacement-card availability and compatibility, and whether the published document applies to the selected build and destination. Neither record promises DIY servicing, an installation load rating, a spare period or compatibility with an unlisted accessory.

 Compliance boundary. Battery, electrical, radio, repairability and product-specific obligations depend on the exact design and destination market. Architecture is not a compliance conclusion: agree the document route for the quoted model and obtain qualified advice where required.

## Questions to put in the RFQ

 Who will charge or service the installed product, and how often?

 Which part is intended to be replaced: the whole light, the light bar, the battery module or the driver?

 What tools and access are required after installation?

 How is the correct spare identified, ordered and kept compatible?

 Which change to battery, connector, firmware or housing would trigger a new sample or document review?

 Specify the lifecycle with the product. Send the application, installation count, access constraints, expected operating frequency and maintenance responsibility. Discuss the architecture on WhatsApp →

 Related: all buyer insights sample-to-scale ordering choose a sensing technology sample verification 2026–2027 market brief

========================================================================
# Sample-to-Scale Sensor Lighting Orders | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/sample-to-scale-sensor-lighting-orders/
Summary: Use four buyer gates—sample, pilot, replenish and scale—to control sensor-lighting acceptance tests, revisions, documents, packaging and repeat orders.

Home › Buyer Guides › Sample-to-Scale Orders

## From sample to scale: ordering sensor lighting in four steps

 A sample proves one configuration. It does not prove that a product can launch, replenish and scale without specification drift, packaging errors, document gaps or excess stock. Use four separate gates—and write the acceptance condition for each one.

 TUODI International buyer guide

![TUODI OEM and ODM product development and production process](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/oem-odm-process.jpg)

 A factory development process becomes safer for the buyer when every stage has a written input, output and approval gate.

 Short answer. Sample to prove the exact configuration. Pilot to prove launch operations and early demand. Replenish to prove that the winner can be repeated without unapproved changes. Scale only after quality, service, documentation and sell-through have evidence behind them.

Building a cabinet-light sample brief? Start with the Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X) specifications, Detachable-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6111) configuration and furniture integration checklist. Record the selected configuration before comparing quotations.

## The four order gates

## Sample
Does this exact product work in the intended application?

## Pilot
Can the buyer launch, receive and support a limited first run?

## Replenish
Can the accepted configuration be repeated predictably?

## Scale
Is the programme ready for larger inventory and commitment?

## Gate 1: sample the configuration, not only the catalogue model

 A model number is not a complete specification. The sample record should identify the sensing variant, power format, dimensions, finish, light settings, accessories, labels, packaging assumptions and any firmware or component revision that matters.

 Acceptance area | What the sample should answer

 Sensing behaviour | Sensor type, trigger/presence distance and angle, hold time, daylight threshold, re-triggering, through-panel boundary, adjacent-unit interference and false activation in the real installation.

 Light output | Brightness, colour temperature, diffusion, dimming behaviour and visible consistency between units.

 Power and charging | Cell chemistry, rated capacity, pack dimensions, protection, connector, charge indication, while-charging behaviour, realistic runtime method, low-battery behaviour and heat.

 Electrical integration | Input/output voltage, dry-contact or relay logic, actual lamp/driver/contactor load, inrush/derating, wiring, override and state after power loss.

 Mounting | Fit, alignment, magnet or clip retention, adhesive surface and access after installation.

 Environment | Indoor/outdoor boundary, operating temperature, humidity and any IP marking with the named test report—or an explicit note that no third-party ingress test is available.

 Controls, data & firmware | Buttons, remote, protocol/version, target hub, pairing count, app/API, event and timestamp requirements, offline buffer, firmware ownership/update path, linked-light behaviour and what happens after power or network loss.

 Packaging | Product protection, accessory count, labels, barcode fields, instructions, destination-language requirements, unit box and master-carton quantity/dimensions/gross-net weights.

 Documents | Which issued record names the exact model/build and cell, who holds it, which market or freight route it supports, its current validity and what is still only proposed.

 If the project involves one wireless sensor controlling several bars, a hotel-room presence controller, a custom sound library or an altered battery pack, add the protocol/pairing count, I/O logic, audio-file map or cell/report map as a named configuration field. A supplier saying “supported” is not the same as that field being frozen.

 Gate output: a dated sample approval record and a list of open items. The approved unit can become the golden sample only when both sides agree what it represents.

## Gate 2: pilot the launch system

 The pilot is not simply a smaller production order. It tests whether purchasing, packaging, receiving, installation and early support work together.

 Limit the number of variables. A pilot containing many lengths, sensors, finishes and packs may be too small to produce a useful signal for any one variant.

 Test the real carton. Include the intended accessory count, label fields, instructions and protective packaging—not a hand-carried engineering sample.

 Record receiving data. Capture carton condition, unit count, visible defects, function checks and the time needed to inspect.

 Track use by application. Returns from a wardrobe programme and a corridor retrofit do not mean the same thing.

 Do not assume flexibility. Mixed models, neutral stock, later-applied packaging and small pilot quantities vary by product and order. Put each requested condition on the quotation.

 Gate output: a launch report that separates product performance, packaging, logistics and user-fit issues.

## Gate 3: prove replenishment before the stock runs out

 A successful pilot can still fail on the repeat order if the accepted configuration is not controlled. Replenishment needs its own written checks:

 Configuration

## Repeat the approved reference
Quote the same model, variant, dimensions, finish, accessories, packaging and labelled revision. List any requested change separately.

 Change control

## Define what needs re-approval
Battery, sensor, LED, driver, connector, firmware, adhesive, housing or packaging changes may need a new sample or document review.

 Documents

## Documents still match the model
Confirm the issued document still maps to the exact model and destination. A proposed lab route is not an issued authorization.

 Timing

## Order from a dated lead time
Ask when the unchanged order can be repeated, what starts the clock and which materials or custom packaging sit on the critical path.

 Gate output: a repeat-order specification with approved substitutions, re-sample triggers, a dated quotation and a confirmed shipping/document path.

## Gate 4: scale when the pilot results agree

 Scale is a commercial decision, not a quantity threshold. Larger commitments make sense when the pilot has enough evidence on sell-through, field performance, support burden and replenishment control.

 The winning variants are clear enough to avoid spreading stock across weak options.

 The acceptance plan catches the failure modes that matter in the intended application.

 The replacement or service path is workable for the expected programme life.

 The exact model-to-market documents and shipping requirements have been confirmed.

 Forecasts, custom packaging or buffer stock have an agreed owner and trigger.

## A concise RFQ brief for the first conversation

 Product and use: application, installation, sensor behaviour and power format.

 Commercial path: sample quantity, intended pilot, expected repeat order and target launch market.

 Customisation: finish, logo, packaging, manual language, accessories and any function change.

 Acceptance: the five tests that must pass before the pilot or production order is approved.

## Commercial options for each order

 Mixed models, neutral stock, delayed packaging, pilot quantities, buffer stock and repeat lead times vary by model and order. Ask which options are available for your selected configuration and record each agreed condition in the quotation.

 Start with the sample gate. Send the intended application, destination, quantity path and required customisation. The team can help turn it into a configuration and acceptance list. Build the order path on WhatsApp →

 Related: all buyer insights sample testing tools serviceable product design OEM / ODM process sensor-light pricing guide 2026–2027 market brief

========================================================================
# Questions to Ask a Sensor-Light Manufacturer | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/sensor-light-manufacturer-rfq-checklist/
Summary: Build a quote-ready sensor-light RFQ covering sensing, electrical loads, batteries, OEM, exclusivity, payment, documents, packing, delivery and sample tests.

Home › Buyer Guides › Sensor-Light Manufacturer RFQ Checklist

## Questions to ask a sensor-light manufacturer before you order

 A stronger RFQ gets you a more accurate product match, quotation and sample. Use this checklist to define the sensing, electrical, battery, OEM, document, packing and delivery details that suppliers otherwise have to guess.

 Choose the sections that apply to your product and send the requirements you already know. For a capability outside the catalogue, ask for feasibility and a sample demonstration on the exact build before committing.

 TUODI International buyer guide

![Factory-supplied functional-check station used to verify an illuminated product](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-fixture-functional-check.jpg)

 Move from “can you make this?” to a configuration, quotation and sample test your team can approve.

 For the fastest useful answer: send the application, target market, expected quantities, power architecture, sensing or control behaviour, physical format, customisation, required documents and five tests the sample must pass. TUODI can then match and quote one exact build instead of replying with a generic catalogue link. Copy the RFQ template →

 Jump to a buyer question:
 product fit
 sensing & electrical
 rechargeable lights
 connected & hotel
 white noise & audio
 OEM / ODM
 documents & markets
 price, payment & shipping
 advanced requirements
 RFQ template

## Illustrative enquiry: one selected configuration

 This is a planning example, not a customer case or quotation. Leave unknown buying inputs unanswered until you can supply them.

Product: Detachable-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6111); reference tdl-6111-35cm. Installation: wardrobe, layout to supply. Quantity and destination: not supplied. Requested next step: confirm the selected sensing pack, connector, colour settings and battery capacity. Ask whether replacement cards can be ordered separately, and match documents to the selected build.

 Prepare this configuration enquiry; the builder carries the current reference revision and open questions.

## 1. Product fit and sample

 A product link rarely identifies the full build. Fix the model, revision, dimensions, included parts and sample results before comparing prices.

 Question to settle | What a useful answer should contain

 Which current model fits the application? | Active model code, configuration suffix, application boundary and the current alternative if the linked item is run-out or discontinued.

 Can I see the complete catalogue? | The relevant product-family pages first, then a dated catalogue or shortlist rather than an undifferentiated archive.

 Can you send a complete datasheet? | One revision naming dimensions, power, sensing, controls, environment, accessories, packing and document scope.

 Can I see real photos and a working video? | Current-build media showing the front, back, mounting, ports, controls and the requested function. Marketing artwork is not a substitute for a sample test.

 What sizes, finishes and mounting formats exist? | Nominal and complete assembled dimensions, colour/finish, housing material and every included mounting part.

 Is the hook, stand, case, sensor or battery part sold separately? | Exact spare-part number, compatible revisions, separate-sale status, pack quantity and continuity commitment.

 Can I buy one or two units before a bulk order? | Sample configuration, cost, dispatch basis, freight, build time and whether a production-order credit is agreed on the quotation.

 Is this an existing platform or a new development? | What is already tooled and tested, what changes by configuration, and what requires engineering, tooling or a new document route.

## 2. Sensing and electrical architecture

 Specify sensing behaviour, supply voltage and output switching separately. That prevents an apparently suitable sensor from arriving with the wrong range, wiring or load interface.

 Question to settle | What to freeze in the sample or quotation

 PIR, microwave radar, hand-wave, photocell, door contact or presence? | The sensing principle and whether the product detects motion, close-range gestures, daylight or low-movement presence.

 What are the range, angle and blind zones? | Horizontal and vertical coverage, mounting height, target speed/size, sensitivity setting and test-room conditions.

 Can it cover a full room or reach roughly 5–8 m? | A model-specific detection diagram and an on-site sample test; “long range” is not an acceptance criterion.

 Are time, lux and sensitivity adjustable? | Actual steps or ranges, control method, default settings and restart behaviour after power loss.

 What voltage powers the sensor? | Input range, frequency, AC/DC polarity and whether the sensing module has an internal regulated supply.

 What does the output provide? | Switched mains, low-voltage output, relay contact, dry contact, open collector, coil drive or data signal—plus wiring diagram.

 What load can it really switch? | Lamp/driver/contactor type, steady current, inrush, inductive/capacitive derating, relay rating, conductor size and protection.

 Does a timer switch the neutral? | Line/neutral topology, single- or double-pole isolation, switchable-neutral requirement and whether an external contactor is needed.

 Is there manual override? | Override logic, duration, priority relative to the sensor and the state after an outage or manual reset.

 Can it be hardwired at 12 V or 24 V? | Supply tolerance, output interface, cable/connector, maximum run, polarity protection and the exact receiver or driver it controls.

 Can several lights share one plug or controller? | Maximum units and watts, connector topology, cable limits, simultaneous start/inrush and approved expansion parts.

 Will it work in hot, humid, outdoor or splash-prone locations? | Operating-temperature/humidity basis and a named ingress test report. An IP number on a housing is not third-party proof.

## 3. Rechargeable cabinet-light configuration

 Question to settle | What to record

 Which complete lengths are available? | Complete assembled length and separate light-section/battery-module lengths so component dimensions are not mistaken for the finished product.

 Can a short bar use a 3000 mAh battery? | Cell chemistry, rated and measured capacity, cell/pack dimensions, protection board, available internal volume, weight and heat—not a label-only upgrade.

 What protects the battery? | Overcharge, over-discharge, short-circuit and temperature protection; cell and pack report mapping; and the approved charger/input.

 USB-C, Micro-USB or a removable battery card? | Physical connector, input rating, cable supplied, charge indicator, replacement path and whether connector changes alter documents.

 Can the light operate while connected to power? | Pass-through behaviour, charging priority, heat, battery-cycle impact and whether the intended use is continuous or occasional.

 How long does charging and runtime take? | Brightness, mode, trigger frequency, ambient conditions, ageing factor, cut-off point and test log. “Days per charge” without a use pattern is incomplete.

 What output and colour quality will I receive? | Lumens, CCT steps, CRI, LED count by length, dimming range/method, diffusion and unit-to-unit tolerance.

 How is it mounted? | Magnet/plate/clip design, adhesive brand or grade, target surface preparation, pull/shear test, removal access and replacement parts.

 Can it be black, waterproof or a special wavelength? | Finish and optical target as separate changes; for waterproofing or a wavelength such as 670 nm, require an engineering sample and measurement evidence.

 Can it be individually hardwired under cabinets? | Whether the offered platform is rechargeable, removable low-voltage or fixed wired; do not infer hardwiring from the appearance of a light bar.

## 4. Connected lighting and hotel-room control

 Question to settle | What must be demonstrated

 Can one external sensor switch several light bars together? | Protocol/frequency, pairing procedure, maximum receivers, latency, synchronisation, range and recovery after power loss.

 Can PIR, hand-wave and door sensors use the same receiver? | Compatible part numbers, pairing/interchange rules, priority logic and a video or sample using the exact requested combination.

 Does it support Matter, Zigbee, Z-Wave, Wi-Fi or another RF system? | Exact protocol/version, radio module, certification path, hub compatibility and what is implemented today versus proposed.

 Can it integrate with our hub or application? | API/SDK, data model, command and event list, authentication, cloud dependency, firmware ownership and update route.

 Can it report when mains power failed and for how long? | Event source, timestamp source, offline clock/buffer, upload behaviour after reconnection, accuracy and data-retention limits.

 Can a hotel room combine door contact and presence sensing? | Occupied/vacant state logic, delay, sleeping/low-movement test, false-off containment, override and commissioning procedure.

 Can the controller drive an external DIN-rail contactor? | Dry-contact/coil output, fail-safe state, coil voltage/current, isolation, enclosure and who supplies the contactor.

 Does one key-card switch read both 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz cards? | A same-unit demonstration with both credentials, supported technologies, card whitelist logic and clear distinction from two separate variants.

 Can it connect to BMS or hotel controls? | Required interface—dry contact, RS-485/Modbus or another defined protocol—register/event map, isolation and commissioning responsibility.

 What happens after power or network loss? | Output state, retained pairings/settings, clock behaviour, reconnection sequence and a repeatable recovery test.

 If your project needs Matter, Zigbee, Z-Wave, outage-duration logging, same-unit dual-frequency key-card reading or a switchable-neutral timer: include it as a development requirement. TUODI's published catalogue does not present these as standard functions, so feasibility and an exact-build demonstration come before a production promise.

## 5. White-noise, audio and nursery-product projects

 Question to settle | What to specify

 Which sounds and how many are included? | Dated file list, category, length, encoding, loop point and the exact model/firmware configuration.

 Is the noise mechanical or speaker-generated? | Sound-generation architecture and an acoustic sample; do not infer “real fan” from the word white noise.

 Can our own audio library be loaded? | Number/size/format of files, storage method, naming/order, looping, programming ownership and production test.

 Is audio loaded by TF/SD card or flashed to memory? | User-removable versus factory-programmed storage, update route, content security and whether a hardware/firmware revision is required.

 Will a track loop continuously without an audible gap? | A full-duration listening test using the final encoded file and timer behaviour at the loop boundary.

 Bluetooth, app-connected or fully offline? | Radio/version and app requirements—or explicit confirmation that no Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, app or cloud function is present.

 Can the display numbers or lights be turned off? | Night-mode controls, minimum brightness, retained settings and whether indicator LEDs remain visible.

 What are the timer, volume and sound-pressure ranges? | Actual steps/ranges and a dB measurement distance/setting, not an unreferenced “quiet” claim.

 What are charge time and battery runtime? | Battery configuration, local/Bluetooth/light mode, volume/brightness, cut-off and test basis.

 Can the housing, strap, PCB, app or controls be redesigned? | Existing-platform limits versus new industrial design, tooling, electronics and software work; prototype plan; ownership; cost; MOQ and schedule.

 Nursery briefs should specify materials, small-part/strap risks, temperature, charging and destination-market requirements. We make no medical, sleep-treatment or infant-safety claim.

## 6. OEM, ODM and configuration control

 Question to settle | What belongs in the project record

 Can you sign an NDA before receiving our drawings? | Named parties, covered information, permitted use, term, governing terms and the files released after signature.

 Which changes fit an existing model? | Logo, finish, packaging and firmware/content changes separated from battery, PCB, radio, sensor, housing and tooling changes.

 What is the prototype path? | Feasibility review, engineering input, prototype type, sample quantity, test plan, revision loop and approval gate.

 What are tooling and development charges? | Tool/item list, ownership, storage/maintenance, modification rights, refund/credit conditions and what deliverables the fee buys.

 What is the MOQ for logo, packaging and a functional redesign? | Three separate thresholds. Printing minimums, component purchase lots and new-tooling economics are different constraints.

 Can the logo be printed or laser engraved? | Position, size, artwork format, colour/finish, sample approval and permanence/abrasion check.

 Can packaging and manuals be customised? | Dieline, dimensions, materials, print finish, languages, marks/labels, accessory map and responsibility for legal/importer fields.

 Can you match a reference product without copying protected branding or design? | Translate the reference into a neutral performance, interface and acceptance brief; identify protected branding, appearance and IP boundaries; and do not call the result “equivalent” without agreed comparative testing.

 Can we supply our own PCB or app and buy only the housing or mechanical assembly? | Interface and control drawings, incoming inspection, assembly/integration responsibility, warranty boundary, document holder, IP ownership, MOQ and packing for the component-only scope.

 Is this model or platform already exclusive to another buyer in my country or sales channel? | The exact model, tooling and design rights; territory and channel; exclusivity term and performance conditions; pre-existing rights; and which custom elements, if any, can actually be reserved.

 Who owns firmware, app, source files and tooling? | Pre-existing IP, project deliverables, source-code/SDK access, account ownership, maintenance and exit/transfer terms.

 How is the approved build protected from drift? | Golden sample, BOM/revision, approved substitutions, change-notice period and re-sample/document triggers.

## 7. Certification, test reports and destination markets

 Question to settle | What a document check should show

 Which document covers this exact model? | Issued record number, model list, product description, applicant/holder, manufacturer, laboratory/body, date, standard and market.

 Is it a grant, certificate, attestation, report, declaration or marking? | The document type stated accurately; a logo or factory claim is not promoted to an approval.

 Does the report cover the offered revision and component change? | Exact suffix/build, sameness basis and whether battery, radio, power or housing changes require review or re-testing.

 Can you provide a declaration of conformity? | Correct legal manufacturer/responsible party, model, applicable legislation/standards, signature/date and supporting technical records.

 What is needed for the EU, Great Britain, Northern Ireland, US, Canada or another market? | A model-and-destination document map. Do not treat CE, UKCA, FCC or another acronym as universally interchangeable.

 Does an ingress claim have a test report? | Report number, tested configuration, method, result and current relevance—or a clear statement that the number is only the manufacturer's own marking.

 What battery transport documents are current? | Cell/pack mapping, UN 38.3 summary, MSDS and carrier/mode-specific current acceptance documents.

 What packaging and importer data must the factory supply? | Materials, weights, label fields, carton data and technical records separated from the buyer/importer/responsible-operator obligations in the destination.

 What is the HS code? | A proposed classification tied to the exact product and destination review; the importer or broker remains responsible for final classification.

 How long is each document valid? | Expiry or continuing-validity basis, surveillance/renewal status and a pre-shipment recheck where carrier or market rules change.

## 8. Samples, price, payment, packing, delivery and after-sales

 Question to settle | What the quotation should state

 Can I start with one unit, a pilot or a mixed-model trial? | Allowed quantity/configuration, sample or stock status and which assumptions change for production.

 What are prices at several quantity levels? | Exact SKU/configuration, quantity, currency, tax status, Incoterm, included packaging/accessories and quotation validity.

 What payment methods and currency are available? | Seller and payee legal entity, currency, bank or platform route, fees, refund conditions and whether any buyer-protection service actually applies. You pay the cost of goods in full when you place the order, and any other charges on your quotation in full before the goods ship. Confirm your inspection point and what triggers shipment release.

 What does the sample cost include? | Product, custom work, freight, duty/tax basis and any production-order credit agreed before shipment.

 What are sample and production lead times? | Preparation/build time, approval dependencies, materials/packaging critical path, start-of-clock event and dated dispatch estimate.

 Is the exact variant in stock? | SKU, quantity, location, revision, packaging state, document status and reservation/dispatch terms.

 EXW, FOB, DAP or DDP? | Named place, included charges, freight mode, customs/duty/tax responsibility and any battery route restriction.

 What are unit-box and master-carton data? | Box dimensions/weight, units per carton, carton dimensions, gross/net weights and pallet assumptions where relevant.

 Can you ship directly to customers? | Supported products/destinations, one-order minimum, processing time, tracking, returns, neutral-pack requirements and system/API capability.

 Can packaging omit invoices and supplier branding? | Exactly which marks/documents remain for legal, customs and safety reasons, and what can be neutralised by agreement.

 Can you share a non-confidential customer or market reference? | Only a reference the customer has authorised, with the product, period and supply scope stated narrowly. If confidentiality prevents names, ask for other verifiable evidence rather than an unattributed logo list.

 What are warranty, DOA and remedy terms? | Period, covered defect, evidence, notice window, allowance, replacement/credit/repair, freight allocation and excluded misuse.

 What happens after a successful sample? | Production approval, final PI, golden sample/BOM, inspection plan, change control, packing sign-off and shipment release.

 Can a repeat buyer reorder the same build? | Revision and availability recheck, approved-substitution control, current lead time and any re-sample/document trigger.

## Advanced requirements to settle before sampling

 These projects can involve new electronics, firmware, tooling, documents or logistics. Keep the requirement in your brief, then ask for feasibility, the exact proposed build and a sample demonstration before budgeting around it:

 One sensor synchronising several bars across interchangeable PIR, hand-wave and door-sensor inputs.

 Matter, Zigbee or Z-Wave integration with a buyer-owned hub and application.

 Mains-outage events, offline timestamps and duration logging.

 A same-unit 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz hotel key-card reader.

 Presence plus door-contact hotel logic with a dry-contact or contactor output.

 A two-hour hot-water timer with switchable neutral.

 12 V radar/presence sensing with relay or dry-contact output.

 Custom audio libraries, removable storage, gapless looping, buyer-designed PCB/app or full new housing.

 IP67 or outdoor use, custom optical wavelengths, and exact North American or destination-specific approvals.

 Year-round stock, per-order dropshipping, blind packaging and API integration.

## Copy-and-paste RFQ structure

 Application: installation, user behaviour and failure that must be avoided.

 Product/configuration: preferred model or format, dimensions, materials, finish and accessories.

 Power and control: input, output/load, sensing, timing, connectivity and recovery after power/network loss.

 Market and documents: destination, sales channel, required document types and packaging/label responsibilities.

 Commercial path: sample, pilot and expected repeat quantities; required Incoterm and destination.

 Acceptance: five sample tests, result format and the points that must be written into the quotation/PI.

 Ready for a model recommendation and sample quote? Send only the sections that apply. TUODI's international team will map the request to a current platform, flag anything that needs development and return the questions needed to price the right sample. Send the RFQ on WhatsApp →

Related: all buyer insights Product Finder sample-to-scale order gates sample verification OEM / ODM process shipping route check document gallery

========================================================================
# What Drives Sensor Light Prices — Wholesale Guide | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/pricing-guide/
Summary: What moves a sensor light's wholesale price: length, battery format, sensing type, what is in the box and order size, using TUODI's published ranges.

Home › Buyer Guides › What drives the price

## What drives the price of a sensor light

 Start with a matched quotation: published ranges cover different lengths, batteries, controls, included parts and order quantities. They do not isolate the price effect of one feature. Compare the same configuration, quantity and commercial basis before attributing a difference to length, battery or sensing type. Every range below is indicative and tiered by quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight is quoted separately.

Why not buy only on the lowest unit price? The factory's own testing found a much lower defect rate for the Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915) and Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X) than for the generic samples it compared them with. The figures, their limits and the pictures are on the quality comparison page.

## Five comparisons to make before choosing a quotation

 Lever
 What to compare
 Why

 Length
 Length and its associated configuration
The Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X) family runs US$4.91–13.05 per unit for 100–500 units for the 12, 23 and 60 cm builds only; the 30 / 40 cm revisions are quoted on request. The listed lengths also use different LED and battery configurations — 300 mAh at the short end, 4400 mAh at the long end.

 Battery format
 Whether cells are included
A dry-cell model carries no cell in the box. The AAA-Battery Sensor Light Bar (TDL-7120) runs on 4 × AAA, with price on request; the Big-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6108A) with a built-in 4000 mAh pack is US$9.14 per unit, minimum 1,000 units. These are different products; the price gap is not a measured battery-format saving.

 Sensing type
 Match length, battery and control
 Within the same 6110 bar family: PIR US$4.91–13.05, hand-wave IR US$4.91–13.05, microwave radar US$7.94–13.57 per unit, each for 100–500 units. The priced IR lengths are 12, 23, 40 and 60 cm. The priced PIR lengths are 12, 23 and 60 cm; PIR 30 / 40 cm is on request. Compare the entry configurations before attributing the difference to radar: the radar family’s entry size is a 24 cm bar with a 1500 mAh cell, while the PIR family starts at 12 cm and 300 mAh. The floors are not the same product, so the gap between them is not a sensor premium. Choose the sensor on how it will behave in the installation, not on price.

 What else is in the box
 Included devices and mounting parts
A remote control is a second device with its own board, housing and cell. The Spliceable Remote-Control Cabinet Light (TDL-6110XRF-DJ) is quotation-only; specify the number of bars and remotes required; the Wireless Picture & Display Light (TDL-7134) is US$8.87 per unit for 100–500 units. Confirm which charging and mounting parts are included; separate spare-card availability needs its own answer.

 Order size and customisation level
 Sets which tier you are quoted on
 Each price states its quantity basis: 100–500 units or a minimum of 1,000 units, depending on the model. There are four MOQ levels, not one — samples of stock models, stock product, logo and packaging, and full custom development — and each has its own minimum. Printing minimums, not production, usually set the logo-and-packaging one.

## Compare functions on matching configurations

 The MC550 nursery series includes clock, white-noise and colour variants in one 97 × 86 × 110 mm housing and one carton format, with published ranges of US$8.77–12.12 per unit for 100–500 units. The white-noise MC550BL is US$12.12, the MC550TIME clock is US$9.40 and the MC550RF colour lamp is US$8.77. Those ranges do not show the cost effect of a feature or platform on its own. If you are weighing two feature sets, ask for quotations on the same configuration, quantity and commercial basis before comparing them.

## What sits outside the unit price

 Freight. The figures in this guide cover the product price, including delivery within China. International freight and duty are quoted separately as a landed door-to-door price once we know the destination and the volume.

 Certification for your market. Where a model already holds a document we will say so and name it on the certifications page. Where it does not, testing for your market is a separate line — and worth agreeing before tooling, not after.

 Tooling. Logo printing, laser engraving, colourways, giftbox and blister packaging and multi-language manuals are standard customisation. A new housing is not — that is an ODM project with its own mould cost.

 The sample. Samples are quoted as one combined goods-and-shipping amount. A sample-fee credit may be agreed for a subsequent large order; where it is, the quotation states the eligible costs, credit amount and qualifying order.

 Quotation and payment currencies. We can quote and accept payment in USD, EUR, GBP and SGD. Other currencies may be arranged; tell us your preference when requesting a quotation.

## How to get a number that will hold

 Give the length and the quantity together. Either one alone cannot be priced on a bar.

 Say which battery format you need — dry cell, built-in rechargeable, or a removable card. Include it with the length, controls, included parts, quantity and commercial basis so the quotations compare the same configuration.

 Describe the installation alongside the sensor preference. Mounting position, surface and market tell us more than a sensing type does, and help us judge whether the proposed sensing method fits the application.

 Ask what the quote is valid until. Cell, copper and controller prices move. A range on a website is a starting point; a dated quotation is the thing you order against.

 Send the model and your target quantity and you will get a number for your tier rather than a range. If you are still choosing between formats, describe the application and we will price two options side by side. Ask on WhatsApp →

## Questions buyers ask about sensor-light pricing

 Why does TUODI's sensor light bar price vary so much by length?

Rarely just length. On the Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X) family, the five published lengths run from 12 to 60 cm, and both LED count and battery capacity scale with the bar: a 300 mAh cell on the 12 cm bar, 4400 mAh on the 60 cm. A shorter bar is not the same product at a lower price. Confirm the LED count for your length, and compare quotations on matching configurations and quantities.

 Can TUODI make a sensor light bar in a custom length that's not on your standard size chart?

 Yes. A length outside the published sizes is quoted as a custom tooling job, cut from an existing aluminium profile on the factory's own cutting equipment, with its own minimum order. One worked example: a 50 cm TDL-6110X bar from the 60 cm profile, offered at 250 or 300 lm with a 3000 or 4500 mAh pack, and planning figures of 5-7 days for a sample and 25-30 days for production. Documents for a listed length do not automatically cover a custom build. Before ordering for the EU, ask us to check how the manufacturer's conformity assessment, technical documentation and EU declaration of conformity cover the exact build; ask for your own length's figures in writing.

 Is a rechargeable sensor light more expensive than a battery version just because of the battery?

Not exactly. The dry-cell AAA-Battery Sensor Light Bar (TDL-7120, 4 x AAA) and the rechargeable Big-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6108A), with its built-in 4000 mAh pack, are two different products, not one design offered two ways, so the distance between their published ranges does not measure what a rechargeable cell adds. If you are still choosing, describe the application and ask for both formats priced side by side at the same quantity and commercial basis.

 Does adding a remote control significantly raise the price of a sensor light?

The published ranges cannot answer that. A remote is a separate device carrying its own board, housing and cell, but the ranges on this site span different products, so they do not isolate what adding one costs. The Spliceable Remote-Control Cabinet Light (TDL-6110XRF-DJ) pairs PIR sensing with a 2.4 GHz remote. Ask for the same bar quoted with and without the remote, and confirm which charging and mounting parts each quotation includes.

 Does your quoted unit price include shipping, certification testing and tooling, or are those extra?

 None of them are in the unit price, apart from delivery within China. Published figures cover the product price with delivery within China; international freight and duty are quoted separately as a landed price once the destination and volume are known. Where a model does not already hold the document your market needs, testing for that market is a separate line. Logo, packaging and colourways are standard customisation, but a new housing is an ODM project with its own mould cost. Ask for each line in the quotation.

 Notes

 Quotation review: 13 September 2026. Indicative USD product prices depend on the selected model, configuration and quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and current price validity are confirmed on quotation.

 Related: all buyer insights sample-to-scale ordering full product finder with price ranges OEM & ODM customisation buyer FAQ why TUODI costs more choosing a sensor type motion sensor cabinet lights

========================================================================
# PIR vs Microwave vs Hand-Wave Sensors | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/pir-vs-microwave-sensor/
Summary: Compare PIR, microwave radar and hand-wave sensors for lighting products: detection behaviour, false triggers, battery use and matching TUODI models.

Home › Buyer Guides › PIR vs Microwave Radar vs Hand-Wave

## PIR vs Microwave Radar vs Hand-Wave Sensors — which should your product use?

 Short answer: PIR is often the starting point for battery-powered cabinet and closet lights because it detects moving heat and generally needs a direct view. Microwave radar can sense through some plastic and thin panels and is generally less temperature-dependent than PIR, so placement and enclosure behaviour should be tested on the sample. Hand-wave (IR gesture) is for surfaces where motion sensing would false-trigger — you switch the light deliberately. Related model names do not mean interchangeable accessories or controls: confirm the selected build, dimensions, mounting and accessories on the quotation and sample.

## The three technologies side by side

 PIR (passive infrared)
 Microwave radar
 Hand-wave / touch (IR gesture)

 How it works | Detects moving body heat through a Fresnel lens | Doppler radar — senses motion by reflected radio waves | Near-field IR beam detects a deliberate hand pass; touch pad cycles settings

Typical detection | 3–5 m range, ~120° cone (Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light, TDL-6110X) | <3 m range, ~150° coverage (Radar Sensor Cabinet Light, TDL-6110XWB) | close-range hand sweep (Hand-Wave & Touch Cabinet Light, TDL-6110X-IR); <30 cm on the Inline Hand-Wave Toggle (TDL-7158WB-T)

 Line of sight | Required — does not see through wood, glass or plastic | Not required — can sense through some plastics and thin panels; test the actual panel or enclosure and placement on the sample. | Required (by design — that's the point)

 Temperature sensitivity | Weaker in warm rooms (body vs ambient contrast shrinks) | Generally less temperature-dependent than PIR | Designed for deliberate near-field activation

 Power draw | Typically lower draw; runtime still depends on capacity, brightness, triggers and hold time | Higher than PIR (active emitter) | Low

 Unintended activation risks | Pets, warm drafts or heaters within the field of view | Movement behind thin walls or panels can trigger it | Lower risk when the near-field activation zone is positioned and sampled correctly

 Best for | Closets, wardrobes, drawers, stairs, hallways | Kitchens, enclosed furniture, warm rooms, hidden mounting | Desks, display shelves, workbenches, retail counters

TUODI models | Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X), Detachable-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6111), Big-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6108A), AAA-Battery Sensor Light Bar (TDL-7120) and Folding Motion-Sensor Work Light (TD-CL05) | Radar Sensor Cabinet Light (TDL-6110XWB), Carrot Night Light (LB-01) and the radar-switch line | Hand-Wave & Touch Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X-IR) and hand-sweep 5V bars

## Decision rules that hold up in practice

 Battery-powered and inside furniture? PIR is often the starting point. A closed door normally blocks its view, which can reduce nuisance triggering; runtime still depends on capacity, brightness, triggers and hold time.

 Sensor must be hidden behind a panel, or the room runs warm? Radar can read through some plastics and thin panels and is generally less temperature-dependent than PIR. Test the panel, enclosure and placement on the sample.

 People linger near the light without wanting it on? Hand-wave offers deliberate near-field control. Test the activation distance and mounting position so ordinary movement does not cross the zone.

 Long corridors or staircases? Some quoted 2.4G wall- and foot-light configurations can link one sensor trigger across a chain. Confirm the selected models, receiver count and control setup on the quotation and sample.

 Mixed catalogue? Use the selected model and quoted build to confirm dimensions, mounting and accessories before you standardise a range or approve a sample.

## Try the difference yourself

Move your cursor (or drag on touch) — you are the person in the room. The wardrobe panel on the right illustrates line-of-sight behaviour. The Inline Hand-Wave Toggle (TDL-7158WB-T) mode illustrates its 10 GHz, under-30 cm hand-wave behaviour; this demonstration is not a measured installation result. Ranges and angles shown are the published figures for the TUODI models named below each mode.

PIR — Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X, 3–5 m / 120°)
Radar — Radar Sensor Cabinet Light (TDL-6110XWB, <3 m / 150°)
10 GHz hand-wave — Inline Hand-Wave Toggle (TDL-7158WB-T, <30 cm)

 PIR mode: walk into the cone and the light comes on — but stand still and it lets go. Check whether that behaviour matches the intended use.

## Three radar bands, three jobs

"Microwave" is not one thing in the TUODI range. 5.8 GHz is the workhorse switching band — the Plug-Through Microwave Switch (TDL-2076WB) runs on it. 10 GHz powers the short-throw hand-wave toggles (Inline Hand-Wave Toggle (TDL-7158WB-T), sensing under 30 cm — deliberate gestures, not room coverage). 24 GHz is the band the factory’s catalogued presence range uses. Note it is not the same thing as the 57–64 GHz mmWave devices the trade press calls “presence sensing” — 24 GHz sits above the millimetre-wave boundary at roughly 12.5 mm wavelength. The catalogue gives model, frequency, distance, delay and light-control steps but does not specify stationary-detection behaviour; confirm that behaviour for the exact model before specifying it. If a supplier quotes you "microwave" without a band, ask which — the three behave completely differently.

## Where presence sensing fits, and where it does not

 Presence sensing earns its cost only where the light, fan or air-conditioning must stay on while the person is still. A guide by application, independent of any one supplier's range:

 Application | Default choice | Presence sensing

 Wardrobe or short cabinet | PIR, door contact or hand-wave | Usually unnecessary

 Hotel wardrobe | Door contact or PIR | Usually unnecessary

 Corridor or stairs | PIR with linked control | Only for specific cases

 Battery cabinet bar | PIR | A premium experiment, not a default

 Office desk or meeting room | PIR plus presence | Strong fit

 Bathroom or toilet | PIR plus presence | Strong fit; manage the IP rating and false triggers

 Start with wired or low-voltage installations and real project use cases. Battery-powered presence products come last, because runtime, price and compliance all have to work at once.

## Three checks before choosing a sensor

 Specifying radar for wardrobes. Radar can sense through some wardrobe doors or panels, so a closed door may not stop detection. Test the actual door material, sensor position and sensitivity before deciding whether radar suits the installation.

 Judging PIR range from the datasheet alone. Mounting height, orientation and ambient temperature all change effective range. Tell us the mounting position and we'll confirm real-world behaviour before you commit.

 Ignoring hold time and daylight threshold. Some catalogued sensor models list an 18–30 s hold time or daylight control; availability and adjustment method vary by model. Confirm the selected model's hold time, light-control setting and any separate receiver or control accessory on the quotation and sample.

 Not sure? Describe the application — furniture type, mounting, power source, market — and the factory's engineers will recommend the sensor and settings, backed by samples you can test. Ask on WhatsApp →

 Related: TDL-6110X rechargeable PIR cabinet light TDL-6110X-IR hand-wave cabinet light TDL-6111 detachable-battery sensor light microwave radar sensor switches all buyer insights serviceable sensor-lighting design 2026–2027 market brief motion sensor cabinet light manufacturer PIR & radar sensor switches quality comparison & testing wardrobe lighting solutions buyer FAQ

========================================================================
# Wardrobe & Closet Sensor Lighting for Furniture | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/wardrobe-closet-lighting/
Summary: Specify wireless wardrobe and closet lighting for furniture: PIR placement, rechargeable magnetic bars, removable batteries and matching TUODI platforms.

Home › Buyer Guides › Wardrobe & Closet Lighting

## Wardrobe & Closet Sensor Lighting — for furniture makers and lighting distributors

 Start with the furniture layout and the lighting behaviour you need: movement, a hand gesture or door position. A PIR light responds to movement and its timer; door-open/door-close control needs a matching control configuration. The TUODI platforms below cover standard wardrobes, serviced furniture, drawers and walk-in closets.

 Build a furniture-lighting brief

## Design criteria that matter

 Sensing: PIR is often the starting point inside a wardrobe because a closed door normally blocks its field of view. Radar can sense through some panels, so check the material, sensor position and intended behaviour on the sample. (Compare the options →) For separate cabinet touch, door and proximity controls, see the low-voltage cabinet-control list.

 Power: rechargeable battery with magnetic mounting — no wiring lets furniture ship flat-pack and retrofit into existing pieces. Runtime depends on capacity, brightness, trigger frequency and hold time; use the planning calculator and agree the sample assumptions before production.

 Light quality: selectable colour temperature (warm for bedrooms, neutral/cool for dressing areas), even diffusion so clothes show true colours without stripes.

Servicing: either the bar lifts off its magnets for USB charging, or — on the Detachable-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6111) — a detachable battery card can be charged while the bar stays on the rail.

 Daylight sensor: keeps the light off when the room is already bright, stretching battery life.

## Recommended TUODI platforms

Standard wardrobes | Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X) — PIR >3 m / 120°, tri-CCT, slim aluminium housing, magnet + adhesive-plate install; hold time 15–18 s depending on the sheet, so check it on the sample. Five factory lengths (12 / 23 / 30 / 40 / 60 cm); common selections: 23 cm 1.4 W / 110 lm / 74 LEDs / 1500 mAh · 30 cm 0.6–3 W / 50–180 lm / 102 LEDs / 2200 mAh · 40 cm 3 W / 220 lm / 140 LEDs / 3000 mAh · 60 cm 3.2 W / 280 lm / 216 LEDs / 4400 mAh

Rental / serviced furniture | Detachable-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6111) — charge the detachable card while the bar stays installed. 35 cm configured span
25 cm light section + 10 cm battery card

Power: 1.3 W
Light output: 136 lm

Enquire about 35 cm configured span

54 cm configured span
40 cm light section + 14 cm battery card

Battery capacity: 3000 mAh
Power: 2 W
Light output: 208 lm
LED count: 146 LEDs
Hold time: 15 s

Enquire about 54 cm configured span

Small drawers & shoe cabinets | Big-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6108A) — 380 mm, 4000 mAh big-battery format (2026 spec), charge occasionally not routinely

Budget line | AAA-Battery Sensor Light Bar (TDL-7120) — 4×AAA batteries, magnetic strip, daylight sensor

Walk-in closets | Spliceable Remote-Control Cabinet Light (TDL-6110XRF-DJ) — 25 cm spliceable bars, PIR placement guide 3 m/90° (check on a sample), 1.4 W, 120 lm, 1500 mAh, 2800–5500 K, 30 s hold; ships as one bar plus one remote. The factory recommends six or fewer bars per remote for best results.

Remote (sold separately) | Magnetic Wall Remote (TDL-2041-DJ) — magnetic wall remote, 15 m range, also senses at 3 m, 130 × 40 mm. Takes 2 × AAA, not included in the carton — include the battery requirement in your order

 Lumen and wattage figures are per length from the factory's 2026 quotation. If you are comparing bars across suppliers, compare at the same length — a 60 cm bar quoting 280 lm and a 23 cm bar quoting 110 lm are within a few per cent of each other per centimetre lit.

![TUODI sensor light applications: wardrobe, whole house, desk, kitchen, bedside, entrance](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/apps-grid-en.jpg)

![TDL-6111 sensor light bar mounted over a wardrobe hanging rail](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6111-rail.jpg)

## Your furniture integration record

 Use one record for each selected configuration and furniture position. This is a blank planning record, not a performed installation or clearance measurement.

 Selected reference | Choose a published configuration and revision; record the sensing pack, connector and colour settings still to confirm.

 Furniture and layout | Record the position, internal dimensions, door movement, mounting surface and intended user approach.

 Service action | Record whether the battery card or the whole bar is removed for charging, with the installed bar and mounting parts identified.

 Clearance and mounting approval | Not measured. Record actual service clearance on the identified sample, adhesive preparation, fixing position and who accepts the result.

 Open quotation checks | Carry every unanswered configuration question forward, including runtime conditions, replacement supply and document applicability.

 Prepare the installation enquiry with quantity, destination and the intended service action.

## Wardrobe lighting integration checklist

 Use this checklist with your furniture drawing and the selected model’s buyer summary. Agree mounting and service access on a physical sample before setting a production cut-out, fixing pattern or charging clearance.

 Define the furniture: record the cabinet’s internal width and depth, door travel, shelf or rail position, finish and proposed light location. Mark nearby handles, metalwork and moving parts.

 Choose the control: describe the wanted trigger and shut-off behaviour. Check the PIR field with the door closed and open, or test hand-wave reach at the chosen position. Agree the exact timer on the sample.

 Reserve service access: check room to remove and refit the magnetic bar or battery card, grip it safely and connect the charging cable. Record the measured clearance and connector location from the approved sample.

 Prove the mounting: test the supplied mounting parts on the actual furniture finish. Agree surface preparation, adhesive or mechanical fixing, installation instructions and the inspection method with the factory.

 Approve the complete set: record model, length, sensing pack, colour setting, battery, mounting parts, cable, remote where applicable, artwork and packing. Keep a dated sample and the agreed drawing revision.

 Download a model summary: TDL-6110X PIR · TDL-6111 battery card · TDL-6110X-IR hand-wave · TDL-6110XRF-DJ remote.

 For a production drawing, send the furniture layout and selected configuration through the furniture-lighting enquiry. Confirm dimensions and mounting details with the factory for that build. See service-access trade-offs and sample-to-production approval steps.

 For furniture manufacturers: TUODI supplies OEM programs — your branding, tuned hold times, custom bar lengths and packaging that drops into your flat-pack cartons. The factory supplies the ultra-thin magnetic format as its best-selling line. Discuss your cabinet spec →

 Notes

 Confirm the power, mounting and sensing behaviour on your sample. For TDL-6110XRF-DJ, confirm the grouping, placement and pairing on a sample in the intended layout.

 35 cm: Battery capacity to be confirmed on your quotation.

54 cm: 3000 mAh — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.

 Related: all sensor cabinet lights PIR vs radar guide hotel & corridor lighting OEM process 2026–2027 market brief

========================================================================
# Hotel, Corridor & Staircase Sensor Lighting | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/hotel-corridor-lighting/
Summary: Use a seven-scenario commissioning matrix for hotel occupancy and corridor controls, then assess TUODI sensor formats against the project brief.

Home › Buyer Guides › Hotel & Corridor Lighting

## Hotel, Corridor & Staircase Sensor Lighting

 Hotel projects split into two different jobs: wireless or battery lighting that can retrofit without inter-unit wiring, and room-occupancy control that interfaces with mains lighting or air conditioning. Define which system you need before choosing the sensor, output and commissioning plan.

## Define observable behaviour before choosing the equipment

 The U.S. Department of Energy's Lighting Controls Solutions research and selection guidance identifies installation and configuration complexity as a barrier, and recommends considering control objectives, system capabilities, networking and documentation. These are research and selection resources, not a mandatory hotel certification or a promise of energy savings. For a room or corridor pilot, turn the intended behaviour into a test the project team can observe.

 The matrix below is a suggested project worksheet. The project team defines the acceptance criteria before testing, including the required light state, response and hold times, acceptable false triggers and relevant operating modes. Record the installed position, selected settings, connected loads and sample identity with each result; the scenarios do not prescribe universal timeouts or savings.

 Pilot scenario | Project team defines before testing | Commissioning team observes and records

 Occupied movement | Intended approach routes, coverage boundary and required light response, including a slow guest carrying luggage. | Route and speed, first trigger position, response time and any unlit section or missed movement.

 Low activity or still occupancy | Room-use scenarios such as reading, resting or sleeping, and how the system should preserve the occupied state. | Activity and duration, any unintended dimming or switch-off, and whether the agreed presence logic worked. Corridor motion alone does not prove this case.

 Vacancy | How vacancy is established, the agreed delay and the required light/load state after departure. | Departure, any door event, last detected activity, actual transition time and re-entry behaviour.

 Daylight and ambient light | Required behaviour under the intended day/night conditions and agreed threshold settings. | Ambient conditions at the sensor, settings, output state and any repeated switching as conditions change.

 Adjacent-space false triggering | Areas that should be excluded, such as the next room or traffic beyond a door or partition. | Movement in each excluded area, partition/door condition and any unintended activation; repeat after adjustment.

 Manual or housekeeping override | Who may override, the required override state and how automatic operation resumes. | Control used, resulting state, duration and return to automatic operation.

 Power restoration | The required state and settings after a planned power interruption, with the project's qualified electrical professional approving the test. | Light/load state on restoration, settings retained or reset, and recovery of the agreed automatic behaviour.

 Assign one person to close each failed or untested scenario. Retest affected scenarios after changing placement, settings, firmware or the load interface, and hand over the final settings and observation record with the installation.

## DALI projects: specify the controller as well as the sensor

 The DALI Alliance's sensor and input-device overview identifies occupancy sensing as Part 303 and light sensing as Part 304; an input device supplies information to the lighting-control system. This industry-association technical guidance describes an optional control ecosystem, not the capabilities of the TUODI products below.

 The Alliance's technical note on instance types and controller support warns that not every application controller supports input devices and directs buyers to check the controller supplier and product database. Treat the protocol name as a starting point: ask the integrator to demonstrate the chosen devices and controller against the pilot criteria. These references do not establish TUODI DALI support, certification or compatibility.

## TUODI formats to assess against your project brief

 Follow-the-person lighting: TUODI's interlinked 2.4G wireless sensing lets one sensor trigger a chain of wall and footlights — light travels ahead of the guest down a corridor or staircase without wiring between units.

 Wall & surface formats: the Surface-Mount PIR Light Bar (TDL-7126S; 3 m PIR, 140°, 4 × AAA, 305 mm, IP20, adjustable bracket and induction angle — white, black or silver) and sconce-style wall lights with adhesive or screw mounting — no conduit, no channel cutting in finished walls.

 Recessed PIR Ceiling Switches (TDL-9956J, TDL-9959J) and the Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915) — 5.8 GHz, AC 85–250 V, detection adjustable from 2 to 16 m, delay from 8 seconds to 12 minutes and the daylight threshold from 2 to 2000 lux, all on rotary trimmers — to drive existing corridor luminaires. The adjustment range is the point on a corridor job: one part number commissions differently at a lift lobby, a mid-corridor run and a back-of-house stair. (Microwave switch detail, including where radar is the wrong choice →)

 Battery formats for retrofit: AAA/AA-powered formats include the AAA-Battery Sensor Light Bar (TDL-7120) and the 14-inch Sensor Panel (TDL-7126B-A — 180 lm, or constant power over 5 V USB) where recharging cycles aren't practical for housekeeping.

 Guest-room touches: the Detachable Bedside Light Tube (TDL-8192), sensor night lights for bathrooms, and hotel key-card power switches from the group's electrical line.

 Daylight thresholds and hold times tuned so fixtures ignore daytime traffic and hold long enough for a slow walker with luggage.

![Sensor lighting applications including stairs and corridors](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/cabinet-applications.jpg)

![Detachable Bedside Light Tube (TDL-8192)](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/recessed-sensor-render.jpg)

## Hotel-room occupancy control as a system brief

 A guest may be asleep or still for long periods, while corridor motion outside the room may be frequent. A safe retrofit therefore has to define presence logic, door state, delay, override and the load interface together. Use the fields below when asking for an occupancy or energy-saver controller:

 Detection logic | Presence technology, detection zone, sleeping/low-motion scenario, door-contact input and how occupied/vacant state is decided.

 Delay & override | Vacancy grace period, re-trigger behaviour, housekeeping/manual override and what happens after power loss or a sensor fault.

 Control output | Dry contact, transistor/24 V coil drive or internal relay; normally-open/closed state and fail-safe behaviour.

 Building load | Whether an external contactor is part of the design, the coil/load being controlled, inrush/derating and isolation from the sensor electronics.

 Installation | DIN-rail or wall-panel format, supply voltage, wiring diagram, enclosure, service access and destination electrical requirements.

 Acceptance | Pilot rooms, day/night scenarios, false-off/false-on limits, event log, exact documents and sign-off by the project's qualified electrical professional.

 Scope. TUODI makes key-card, motion and presence-sensing products. No single catalogue SKU delivers the complete door + presence + contactor architecture above, so quote it as an integration project: ask for a wiring diagram and exact model documents, and have the building-load design approved locally before installation.

## For key-card retrofits, prove the credential reader—not only the panel

 Hotel inquiries often ask whether one energy-saver switch reads both 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz cards automatically. A catalogue that offers both frequencies may still mean two separate SKUs. The production sample should identify the exact reader hardware, accepted card/credential types, enrolment or whitelist behaviour, and whether dual-frequency operation happens in the same unit without a mode change. Demonstrate each requested card on that same serialized sample and include the result in the room-pilot record.

 Also fix the receiver's default/fail state, switching interface, load/contactor arrangement, backup behaviour, wiring diagram and state after power loss in the project quotation. Do not rely on a generic family description for these installation-critical points.

 For hotel suppliers and project buyers: tell us corridor lengths, mounting surfaces and the destination market. The factory quotes the fixture mix and sensing settings, then checks compliance for each exact model. Switch products have no blanket CE, RoHS, FCC, PSE or UKCA coverage, and the Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915) has no radio certificate today. Describe your project →

 Related: hotel-control RFQ questions microwave sensor switches sensor modules & relay interfaces sensor light range wardrobe lighting choosing a sensor type certifications 2026–2027 market brief

========================================================================
# Shipping Times, Sample Costs & Delivery | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/shipping/
Summary: See RyanFulfil parcel transit examples, all-in sample goods and shipping quotes, payment currencies and a route check for your TUODI product and destination.

Home › Shipping & Delivery

## Shipping times, sample costs and delivery options

 Samples, wholesale orders and selected dropship lanes can be coordinated through RyanFulfil. Courier samples, wholesale air or sea freight and selected dropship lanes are quoted per shipment, with the service, battery acceptance, customs basis and transit time for your destination; none of these is promised country-wide.

## Quotations, samples and payment

 Samples are quoted as one combined goods-and-shipping amount. A sample-fee credit may be agreed for a subsequent large order; where it is, the quotation states the eligible costs, credit amount and qualifying order. The quotation also states the delivery basis and treatment of destination charges.

 We can quote and accept payment in USD, EUR, GBP and SGD. Other currencies may be arranged; tell us your preference when requesting a quotation. Orders can use the factory as seller of record or an arrangement coordinated by RyanFulfil. The quotation confirms the seller and invoice issuer.

## Choose the shipment type

 Quoted per shipment

## Samples & courier
For evaluation units and urgent documents. Battery acceptance, postcode surcharges and remote-area delivery are checked before dispatch.

 Quoted per shipment

## Wholesale air or sea
For cartons and production orders. Quote basis, destination charges, customs responsibility and shipment documents are stated together.

 Selected lanes

## Dropship fulfilment
Available only for suitable products and destinations. Single-parcel dropship is quoted separately from bulk-order shipping.

 Planning a wholesale shipment? The Product Finder lists carton quantities, dimensions and weights for cabinet lights, white-noise machines, the MC550 series and TD-CL04. Final figures are reconfirmed once packaging is fixed.

## RyanFulfil parcel transit times by destination

 Use the destination table to plan courier delivery of sensor switches, cabinet-light samples and other compact TUODI products. Include the product reference, input voltage, dimensions and quantity so the sales desk can quote the packed shipment.

 The parcel windows count working days after dispatch from RyanFulfil's Guangzhou warehouse. Allow 2–3 processing days unless pre-stocked. TUODI sample preparation and production timing are agreed separately.

 Battery-powered lighting, longer cabinet-light profiles and mixed cartons may need a different route from small wired switches. Send the destination postcode and any delivery constraints with your enquiry. The quotation states carrier acceptance for the exact configuration, battery, packed size and weight; a listed destination is not a promise for every product. Bulk air and sea freight are quoted for the complete order.

 Browse all 147 published destinations

 Indicative parcel transit in working days after dispatch — RyanFulfil reference dated 14 September 2026
 Destination | Region | Express | Standard / Economy

 United States | North America | 5–8 days | 6–12 days

 Canada | North America | 5–7 days | 7–9 days

 United Kingdom | United Kingdom | 3–5 days | 5–8 days

 Germany | Central Europe | 4–6 days | 6–10 days

 France | West Europe | 3–5 days | 6–10 days

 Netherlands | West Europe | 3–6 days | 6–10 days

 Belgium | West Europe | 3–6 days | 6–10 days

 Spain | South Europe | 5–8 days | 6–10 days

 Italy | South Europe | 5–8 days | 6–10 days

 Sweden | North Europe | 5–7 days | 6–10 days

 Denmark | North Europe | 5–7 days | 6–10 days

 Austria | Central Europe | 6–8 days | 6–10 days

 Switzerland | Central Europe | 6–9 days | —

 Australia | Oceania | 4–7 days | 5–8 days

 Japan | East Asia | 4–6 days | —

 Hong Kong | East Asia | 2–5 days | —

 Mexico | North America | — | 8–12 days

 Puerto Rico | Caribbean | — | 15–20 days

 Poland | Central Europe | 6–8 days | 6–10 days

 Ireland | West Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Portugal | South Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Norway | North Europe | — | 8–10 days

 Finland | North Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Czech Republic | Central Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Slovakia | Central Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Hungary | Central Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Romania | East Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Bulgaria | East Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Slovenia | Central Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Croatia | South Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Latvia | North Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Lithuania | North Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Estonia | North Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Luxembourg | West Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Malta | South Europe | — | 6–10 days

 Greece | South Europe | — | 8–12 days

 Cyprus | South Europe | — | 8–12 days

 Iceland | North Europe | — | 12–15 days

 Turkey | East Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Serbia | East Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Albania | South Europe | — | 15–20 days

 North Macedonia | South Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Belarus | East Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Georgia | East Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Armenia | East Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Faroe Islands | North Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Greenland | North Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Gibraltar | South Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Liechtenstein | Central Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Monaco | West Europe | — | 15–20 days

 San Marino | South Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Vatican | South Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Andorra | South Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Guernsey | West Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Jersey | West Europe | — | 15–20 days

 Ukraine | East Europe | — | 10–12 days

 Moldova | East Europe | — | 10–25 days

 Montenegro | South Europe | — | 17–19 days

 Russia | East Europe | — | 15–30 days

 South Korea | East Asia | 5–8 days | 6–8 days

 Singapore | Southeast Asia | 5–6 days | 6–7 days

 Vietnam | Southeast Asia | 5–6 days | —

 Thailand | Southeast Asia | 5–8 days | —

 Indonesia | Southeast Asia | 7–9 days | —

 Macau | East Asia | 3–5 days | —

 New Zealand | Oceania | — | 6–10 days

 Malaysia | Southeast Asia | — | 8–10 days

 Philippines | Southeast Asia | — | 8–10 days

 Sri Lanka | South Asia | — | 15–20 days

 India | South Asia | — | 15–20 days

 Pakistan | South Asia | — | 15–17 days

 Bangladesh | South Asia | — | 15–20 days

 Myanmar | Southeast Asia | — | 15–20 days

 Taiwan | East Asia | — | 15–20 days

 North Korea | East Asia | — | 15–20 days

 Israel | Levant | — | 6–10 days

 UAE | Gulf | — | 6–10 days

 Saudi Arabia | Gulf | — | 8–12 days

 Qatar | Gulf | — | 8–12 days

 Kuwait | Gulf | — | 8–12 days

 Bahrain | Gulf | — | 8–12 days

 Jordan | Levant | — | 10–14 days

 Lebanon | Levant | — | 15–20 days

 Azerbaijan | Caucasus | — | 13–15 days

 Uzbekistan | Central Asia | — | 15–20 days

 Kyrgyzstan | Central Asia | — | 15–20 days

 South Africa | Southern Africa | — | 8–12 days

 Morocco | North Africa | — | 10–15 days

 Mauritius | East Africa | — | 9–14 days

 Seychelles | East Africa | — | 8–13 days

 Rwanda | East Africa | — | 9–13 days

 Réunion | East Africa | — | 10–15 days

 Madagascar | East Africa | — | 10–15 days

 Tanzania | East Africa | — | 11–13 days

 Angola | Central Africa | — | 11–13 days

 Senegal | West Africa | — | 11–15 days

 Zambia | Southern Africa | — | 11–18 days

 Nigeria | West Africa | — | 13–16 days

 Kenya | East Africa | — | 13–16 days

 Ghana | West Africa | — | 13–16 days

 Uganda | East Africa | — | 13–16 days

 Mayotte | East Africa | — | 13–16 days

 Egypt | North Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Ethiopia | East Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Algeria | North Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Cameroon | Central Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Ivory Coast | West Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Zimbabwe | Southern Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Namibia | Southern Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Mozambique | Southern Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Lesotho | Southern Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Liberia | West Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Eritrea | East Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Gabon | Central Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Comoros | East Africa | — | 15–20 days

 Brazil | South America | — | 15–25 days

 Argentina | South America | — | 15–20 days

 Chile | South America | — | 19–21 days

 Colombia | South America | — | 19–21 days

 Peru | South America | — | 15–23 days

 Uruguay | South America | — | 15–20 days

 Costa Rica | Central America | — | 15–20 days

 French Guiana | South America | — | 15–20 days

 Suriname | South America | — | 15–20 days

 Falkland Islands | South America | — | 15–20 days

 Ecuador | South America | — | 17–22 days

 Paraguay | South America | — | 20–30 days

 El Salvador | Central America | — | 20–30 days

 Bolivia | South America | — | 30–40 days

 Honduras | Central America | — | 30–40 days

 Nicaragua | Central America | — | 30–40 days

 Guatemala | Central America | — | 47–50 days

 Panama | Central America | — | 54–57 days

 Tonga | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Vanuatu | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Samoa | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Palau | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Micronesia | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Marshall Islands | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Kiribati | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Tuvalu | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Nauru | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Cook Islands | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Niue | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Christmas Island | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Northern Mariana Islands | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 Wallis & Futuna | Pacific Islands | — | 15–20 days

 A dash means no window is listed for that service. Remote areas may take longer, and weight limits and service availability vary.

 For a long cabinet-light profile, include the packed length in the route-check form below. For rechargeable lighting, add the battery configuration. The sales desk can also check destinations without a listed service; indicative transit windows are not delivery guarantees.

 Parcel reference: RyanFulfil shipping times by country.

## Build a route-check request

 A battery night light and a mains switch do not travel under the same rules, so tell us the product as well as the destination.

 Destination country

 City / postcode

 Product or model

 Quantity

 Shipment type

 Sample / courier
 Wholesale air freight
 Wholesale sea freight
 Selected dropship lane
 Not sure - recommend a route

 Battery included?

 Yes - rechargeable lithium battery
 Yes - replaceable dry cells
 No battery
 Not sure

 Priority

 Best balance of cost and speed
 Fastest feasible route
 Lowest landed cost
 Need delivery by a specific date

 Quote preference

 Door-to-door if available
 FOB Shenzhen
 Deliver to my nominated China forwarder
 Compare available terms

 Deadline or special constraints

 Ask about the current route
 A route check is not a booking. The final quotation states the current carrier option, commercial term and included charges.

## What a shipping quotation should state

 Route type: courier, air, sea or selected parcel line.

 Commercial term and which destination charges are included.

 Whether battery goods are accepted on the proposed route.

 Production lead time separated from transit expectation.

 Required transport and product documents for the exact model.

 Remote-area or postcode restrictions.

 Tracking and handoff expectations, including domestic receiving proof when a China forwarder is nominated.

 What is rechecked immediately before dispatch.

## Where the network reaches

 Shipping is arranged through RyanFulfil, whose published destination network spans North America, Europe and the United Kingdom, Asia-Pacific, the Middle East, Latin America, Africa, the Caucasus and Central Asia, and the Pacific Islands. That is the network's reach, not a promise about your shipment. Which lane is open for your product, quantity and destination, on what service and with which documents, is confirmed per shipment. That is what the route check above is for.

 Battery documentation. Rechargeable products may need a current UN 38.3 test summary and other carrier paperwork. We check document availability and validity against the exact battery, product and freight mode before booking.

 Nominated China forwarder. We can quote delivery to your nominated China forwarder. Give us the warehouse address, receiving contact, warehouse or customer code, carton and label rules, booking deadline, whether delivery is prepaid, and the proof of receipt you need. The quotation states where TUODI's responsibility ends.

## Questions buyers ask about samples and freight

 How long does a courier or sample shipment from TUODI actually take to reach my country?

 RyanFulfil parcel examples dated 6 September 2026 show these indicative windows in working days after dispatch from its Guangzhou warehouse: 5-8 Express or 6-12 Standard to the United States, 3-5/5-8 to the United Kingdom, 4-6/6-10 to Germany, and 5-6/6-7 to Singapore. Add 2-3 processing days unless the item is pre-stocked; factory sample preparation is separate, and remote areas can take longer. These are single-parcel examples, not bulk sea-freight times or a delivery guarantee — ask us to confirm the route for your exact product, battery configuration and postcode.

 Can TUODI deliver my order to my own freight forwarder or Amazon/FBA warehouse in China instead of shipping it to me directly?

 Yes — delivery to a forwarder you nominate in China can be quoted instead of an international shipment. Tell us where the goods go and how they must arrive: full warehouse address and receiving contact, the warehouse or customer code, carton and label rules, your booking deadline, whether delivery is prepaid, and the receipt proof you need back. Ask for the quotation to state where TUODI's responsibility ends.

 Does TUODI support dropshipping single parcels straight to my own customers?

 On selected products and destinations, yes — single-parcel dropship fulfilment is coordinated through RyanFulfil alongside courier samples and wholesale air or sea freight. It isn't offered network-wide: whether your exact product, battery configuration and destination combination works is checked on its own, apart from any bulk-order shipping quote. Use the route-check request with your product, quantity and destination so TUODI can tell you plainly whether dropship suits that combination, or whether wholesale shipment is the better fit.

 Which parts of the world does TUODI's shipping network actually reach?

 Shipping is arranged through RyanFulfil, whose published destination network reaches eight regions: North America, Europe and the United Kingdom, Asia-Pacific, the Middle East, Latin America, Africa, the Caucasus and Central Asia, and the Pacific Islands. Treat that as the network's overall reach rather than a promise about your parcel: which lane is open for your product, quantity and destination, on what service and with which documents, is confirmed per shipment. Send a route check with those details.

 What should TUODI's shipping quotation state before I book, especially for a rechargeable battery product?

 Before you book, the shipping reply should make clear the route type (courier, air, sea or a selected parcel line), the commercial term and which destination charges it includes, whether battery goods are accepted on that route, and production lead time stated separately from transit. Rechargeable products may also need a current UN 38.3 test summary and other carrier paperwork, so ask for documents matched to your exact battery, product and freight mode, plus any remote-area or postcode limits.

 Related: payment, packing & shipping RFQ questions Product Finder document gallery sample acceptance full RFQ builder

========================================================================
# Sensor-Light Construction & Sample Verification | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/reliability/
Summary: Inside TUODI's Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915) and Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X): build, factory checking stations and a sample plan.

Home › Quality Comparison & Factory Testing

## Sensor-light construction and sample verification

 What goes into two TUODI builds: the factory describes the Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915) as built with a shielded and calibrated 5.8 GHz RF design, surge and ESD protection and a double-layer thick-copper PCB, and the compared configuration of the Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X) as built with anodised aluminium, CRI ≥80, a Senba PIR and a protected 3000 mAh Li-polymer pack. Below: what goes into each build, the stations where it is made and checked, and a sample plan you can send with your enquiry.

 Compare the products
 Build a sample plan

## TDL-1915 microwave switch and TDL-6110X cabinet light: what goes into the build

 Sensing, protection, materials and production controls for each build, as the factory describes them. The factory-reported defect-rate comparison is further down this page, with its limits beside it.

![TUODI TDL-1915 microwave sensor switch shown from the front and side](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-1915-hero.jpg)

 Microwave sensor switch

 Factory-reported comparison

## Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915): designed for more stable sensing and switching

 For lighting projects where nuisance triggers, relay stress or installation variation can create costly callbacks.

 More controlled sensing: shielded and calibrated 5.8 GHz RF design with scene filtering.

 More electrical protection: RC suppression, MOV, safety Y-capacitor, surge and ESD protection.

 More robust construction: double-layer thick-copper PCB, V0 PC enclosure and spring terminal.

 Explore microwave switches →

![TUODI rechargeable sensor light illuminating a shelf](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110-shelf.jpg)

 Rechargeable sensor cabinet light

 Factory-reported comparison

## Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X): designed for consistent light, battery and mounting

 For private-label ranges where the buyer needs attractive light output and fewer complaints after charging and installation.

 More refined light: anodised aluminium, diffusing full-face lens, CRI ≥80 and selectable CCT.

 More controlled sensing: Senba PIR with daylight inhibition and AUTO1/AUTO2 modes.

 More complete power design: protected 3000 mAh Li-polymer pack, USB-C and charge-management PCBA in the compared configuration.

 Explore sensor cabinet lights →

 01

## Reduce callbacks
Specify sensing, relay protection, charging and mounting around the real installation—not only the catalogue headline.

 02

## Protect your brand
Translate critical parts and performance into an approved sample so substitutions are visible before production.

 03

## Scale with control
Link the golden sample, lot checks and failure remedy to the purchase order before the first volume run.

## What sits behind the price difference

 Left: the TUODI product. Right: a diagram of what the factory found inside the lower-cost samples it tested. It is not a competitor photograph and not a claim about every low-priced product.

Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915) factory comparison

## A similar-looking microwave switch can be a very different electrical product

 For corridors, garages and multi-unit projects, the hidden value is sensing stability, switching protection and repeatable installation.

 TUODI TDL-1915 product image

## TUODI build

 RFShielded, calibrated 5.8 GHz sensing

 RCRelay suppression plus MOV and Y-capacitor

 2LDouble-layer thick-copper PCB

 V0V0 PC enclosure and spring terminal

 VS

 Factory test notes
no peer photo supplied

## Inside the lower-cost samples tested

 RFBare generic module and standard firmware

 RCSimplified relay and protection stages

 1LSingle-layer thin PCB

 ABSOrdinary or mixed-material housing

 Why you pay more: fewer nuisance triggers, less switching stress and fewer installation callbacks. Prove the RF, relay, protection and terminal configuration on your approved sample.

Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X) factory comparison

## A slim cabinet light can hide major differences in battery, optics and charging

 For private-label ranges, the commercial risk appears later as weak runtime, uneven light, charging faults or mounting complaints.

![TUODI TDL-6110X rechargeable sensor cabinet light](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/tdl-6110x-render-1.jpg)

 TUODI TDL-6110X product image

## TUODI build

 AL9 mm anodised aluminium housing

 PIRSenba sensor and daylight inhibition

 LiProtected 3000 mAh Li-polymer pack

 CCCharge-management PCBA and USB-C

 VS

 Factory test notes
no peer photo supplied

## Inside the lower-cost samples tested

 ABSPlastic or thin/recycled aluminium housing

 PIRGeneric sensor with simpler daylight control

 LiLower-grade cells and simplified protection

 PCBThin board and simplified charging stage

 Why you pay more: more consistent light, charging, runtime and mounting. Approve the housing, PIR, cell, protection board, adhesive and ageing plan before production.

## Full build comparison

 The detail behind the diagrams. It describes the TUODI configurations and the lower-cost samples the factory tested, not every low-priced product on the market.

Microwave-switch comparison

## Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915): stability, protection and installation

 Compared with unnamed lower-cost 5.8 GHz ceiling-switch samples.

 Buyer priority | TDL-1915 build | Lower-cost samples tested | Why it matters to your project

 Stable sensing | Shielded 5.8 GHz module, dedicated PCB antenna, output calibration and filtering for adjacent units, fans, animals and airflow. | Bare generic modules, simplified antenna and standard firmware without the same calibration or scene filtering. | Fewer nuisance triggers and more predictable behaviour in multi-unit installations.

 Electrical durability | Power relay with RC suppression, plus MOV, safety Y-capacitor, surge and ESD protection. | Simplified relay and power stages with suppression or protection parts reduced or absent. | Better protection against switching stress, interference and unstable loads.

 Installation quality | Double-layer thick-copper PCB, separated line/neutral routing, V0-rated PC enclosure and spring terminal described for 4 mm² solid wire. | Single-layer thin PCB, ordinary ABS or mixed recycled material and simpler screw terminals. | A stronger electrical and mechanical platform for repeatable installation.

 Batch consistency | Incoming-material and board checks; function, range and lux checks; packing inspection; then a stated 5% shipment-lot sample. | Incoming parts without the same screening and a basic power-on sample rather than calibrated, multi-unit checks. | More opportunities to catch variation before products reach your warehouse.

Cabinet-light comparison

## Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X): light quality, battery and mounting

 The battery comparison applies to the named 3000 mAh configuration.

 Buyer priority | TDL-6110X build | Lower-cost samples tested | Why it matters to your range

 Light and finish | 9 mm anodised aluminium housing, CRI ≥80 LEDs, diffusing full-face lens and three selectable colour temperatures. | ABS or thin/recycled aluminium with sprayed finish, visible LED hotspots and typically one colour temperature. | A more refined product appearance and more consistent light across shelves and cabinets.

 Sensor behaviour | Senba PIR component with daylight inhibition and AUTO1/AUTO2 modes. | Generic PIR components with simpler daylight control and less false-trigger filtering. | More useful automatic operation and fewer unwanted daytime activations.

 Battery safety and capacity | A-grade 3000 mAh lithium-polymer pack with overcharge, over-discharge and short-circuit protection, plus USB-C charging. | Lower-grade pouch cells with simplified protection and capacity labels the factory found did not match the tested cells. | More confidence in runtime consistency, charging protection and the capacity printed on the pack.

 Charging and mounting | Custom constant-current PCBA with a complete charge-management stage, thick copper and 3M-branded adhesive in the described pack. | Simplified thin-board charging circuits and lower-cost adhesive and packing. | More stable charging and better mounting confidence on the intended surface.

 Batch consistency | Incoming and PCBA checks; finished-function inspection; stated six-hour charge/ageing stage; packing inspection; then a stated 5% shipment-lot sample. | No comparable ageing stage described and only a simple power-on sample. | More opportunities to identify charging, function or assembly problems before shipment.

## Ask us to quote the exact build you want
Put the critical component, sample and batch-control points in the quotation and acceptance plan. That is how a quality comparison becomes a production requirement.

 Build my acceptance plan

## Factory-reported defect-rate comparison

 A factory-reported comparison, not a predicted defect rate for your order. Comparator identities, sample counts, test dates and failure definitions are not supplied.

## Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915)

 TUODI TDL-1915<0.4%

 Unnamed lower-cost samples2–5%

 Factory benchmark only. Sample counts, test dates and failure definitions were not supplied; this is not an independent result or a forecast for your order.

## Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X)

 TUODI TDL-6110X≤0.3%

 Unnamed lower-cost samples2–5%

 Factory benchmark only. Sample counts, test dates and failure definitions were not supplied; this is not an independent result or a forecast for your order.

 How to use these figures. The comparison lists below 0.4% for TDL-1915 and at or below 0.3% for TDL-6110X, against 2–5% in unnamed samples. Comparator model codes, sample counts, test dates, inspection methods, failure definitions and raw results are not supplied. Request the underlying test pack and agree the exact build and an acceptance test for your order before relying on a defect-rate target.

 Comparison method and limits

 Ask for the underlying test results. The defect rates and build comparison come from the factory’s own testing of unnamed market samples. Test dates, comparator SKUs, sample counts, inspection method, failure definition and raw results were not supplied. Treat the figures as the factory’s benchmark, not an independent or market-wide defect rate.

 What to put on your quote. For TDL-1915, confirm the current RF module and firmware revision, load and inrush, relay/protection configuration, enclosure/terminal materials, and the exact lot-sampling method. For the 3000 mAh TDL-6110X configuration, confirm housing and optics, PIR component or approved equivalent, battery chemistry/capacity/protection, PCBA revision, adhesive SKU, ageing conditions and lot-sampling method.

 Other purchase requirements. Confirm warranty, certification, patent and destination-clearance requirements using model- and market-specific records.

 See all 15 factory inspection photographs

 Six photographs from the TDL-1915 inspection set and nine from the TDL-6110X set. They show real benches, racks and lab areas; most do not show a model code, so they prove the process exists, not a pass result for a specific SKU.

## TDL-1915 inspection set

![Connected round sensor units and wiring on a factory inspection bench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl1915-inspection-01.jpg)
 Connected-unit inspection bench.

![Round sensor units arranged in factory bins](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl1915-inspection-02.jpg)
 Units arranged in work-in-process bins.

![Connected round sensor units operating on a multi-tier factory rack](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl1915-inspection-03.jpg)
 Connected multi-tier rack.

![Backs of round sensor units arranged in a blue factory bin](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl1915-inspection-04.jpg)
 Back-side unit inspection.

![Wired factory bench with connected sensor units](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl1915-inspection-05.jpg)
 Wired bench routing and connected units.

![Multiple connected light products illuminated on a factory bench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl1915-inspection-06.jpg)
 Connected illuminated bench.

## TDL-6110X inspection set

![Finished light bars illuminated in vertical rows](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl6110x-inspection-01.jpg)
 Illuminated finished-light check.

![Light bars illuminated together in a factory display rack](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl6110x-inspection-02.jpg)
 Multi-unit light consistency view.

![Round light units operating on a factory bench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl6110x-inspection-03.jpg)
 Operating-unit bench.

![Round light units arranged in blue work-in-process bins](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl6110x-inspection-04.jpg)
 Work-in-process units.

![Connected round lights operating on a multi-tier factory rack](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl6110x-inspection-05.jpg)
 Connected operating rack.

![Factory laboratory area with an integrating sphere](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl6110x-inspection-06.jpg)
 Laboratory area and integrating sphere.

![Factory test station with a production quality dashboard](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl6110x-inspection-07.jpg)
 Test station and production dashboard.

![Connected in-process lights and wiring on a factory bench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl6110x-inspection-08.jpg)
 Connected in-process bench.

![Multiple light products illuminated together on a factory bench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/management-tdl6110x-inspection-09.jpg)
 Illuminated multi-unit check.

## Production and checking stations
Factory photographs of real production and checking stations.

![SMT and reflow equipment on the TUODI factory floor](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-smt.jpg)

 Factory-supplied photograph

## 1 · Electronics production

 What you can see: SMT and reflow equipment at the TUODI factory.

![Factory-supplied illuminated fixture station used during a hands-on light check](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-fixture-functional-check.jpg)

 Factory-supplied photograph

## 2 · Repeatable fixture check

 What you can see: a light checked in a physical fixture station.

![Multiple connected light products illuminated together on a factory test bench](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-batch-light-check.jpg)

 Factory-supplied photograph

## 3 · Multi-unit and ageing checks

 What you can see: multiple connected products illuminated together on a bench.

![Laser marking a TUODI logo on an aluminium sensor-light housing](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-laser-marking.jpg)

 Factory-supplied photograph

## 4 · OEM marking control

 What you can see: laser marking on an aluminium light housing.

 A photograph proves the station exists, not a pass result for your SKU. That is why the checks go on your order.

 Common complaints to cover in sample checks

 Include battery, mounting, controls and sound performance in your sample plan where they matter to your product. The complaint themes below come from 42 retail reviews of rechargeable cabinet lights and 28 of white-noise machines (August 2026), none of them TUODI products. Counts are theme mentions, not defect rates; one review can mention several themes.

## Rechargeable cabinet lights
Battery, charging or electrical durability | 7 of 42
Adhesive or magnet mounting weakness | 4 of 42
Dead-on-arrival / switch / electronics failure | 4 of 42
Brightness shortfall or deterioration | 3 of 42
Sensor timing, interference or activation | 2 of 42

## White-noise machines
Early electronics or battery failure | 5 of 28
Dark-room controls / button ergonomics | 3+ of 28
Physical or portability problems | 3 of 28
Sound artefacts or weak masking | 2 of 28
Charging or battery-indicator problems | 2 of 28

## Set the conditions for your sample test

 Use the following factory specifications as starting points to confirm on your selected build.

Spliceable Remote-Control Cabinet Light (TDL-6110XRF-DJ): agree brightness, trigger frequency and hold time, then measure runtime on the selected sample before setting a maintenance interval.
Camping & Home Light Bar (TDL-6113): standby draw under 80 uA.
Portable White Noise Machine (MC220): about 8 hours local or 6 hours Bluetooth playback; White Noise Machine with Clock (MC330): about 11 hours local or 10 hours Bluetooth playback.

 Actual results can change with brightness, sound mode, trigger frequency, ambient temperature, ageing and installation position. Use the builder below to agree the sample conditions that matter to your market.

 Planning calculator

## Estimate battery runtime under your assumptions

 Generic 3.7 V battery mathematics only - not a TUODI test result or warranty.

 Battery capacity (mAh)

 Active power (W)

 Activations per day

 Hold time (seconds)

 Standby current (mA)

 Low end applies a 0.7 allowance for ageing, temperature and brightness variation. Self-discharge becomes material at long estimates.

## Build a sample acceptance plan

 Select what matters. The result becomes a structured WhatsApp brief so the sample is evaluated against agreed checks, not a vague "looks good".

 Shortlist carried over. The models selected in Product Finder are below; edit them before sending if needed.

 Product or model(s)

 Destination market

 Intended application

 Sample quantity

 Acceptance checks

 Runtime under agreed use assumptions
 Sensor behaviour in the real installation
 Mounting on the intended surface
 Charging and battery indication
 Battery cell, protection and documents
 Brightness and light consistency
 Multi-unit and false-trigger behaviour
 Electrical output and real load
 Connected controls, data and firmware
 Controls, sound and dark-room use
 Packaging, labels and carton data
 Exact model-to-market documents

 Pass/fail details or concerns

 Send acceptance plan
 This sends your brief to the international team. It does not claim that any check has already passed.

## Inspection options

## Sample-first review
Agree acceptance checks before the sample is sent. Record the approved configuration as the production reference.

## Buyer-appointed inspection
Your inspector or agency can attend production or pre-shipment checks. Scope and access are agreed with the order.

## Coordinated QC & freight
TUODI International and RyanFulfil can coordinate inspection, battery-document checks and the current shipping route.

 Add the test your project needs. Battery cycle life, adhesive pull strength or white-noise loop analysis can go into the sample plan. Agree the method and pass limit before testing.

## After-sales contact and warranty

 You should know who handles a problem, what was agreed and how the remedy works. With TUODI International that is one English-speaking contact from quotation to after-sales.

 One contact

## Named English contact
Production and after-sales questions go to the international team. Orders can use the factory as seller of record or an arrangement coordinated by RyanFulfil. The quotation must identify the seller, invoice issuer and party responsible for the agreed remedy. Response target: a substantive first reply within one business day.

 Current written periods

## Model-specific coverage
SR-M01 and SR-T01 faucet adapters: 3-year factory warranty (2026 terms). TDL-6110X 30 / 40 cm: one year on the current quotation.

 Agreed per order

## Commercial remedy
For models without complete published defect and freight terms, define the failure category, allowance and replacement or credit route on the order before production.

 The strongest protection is an approved sample plus a written remedy. A warranty period alone rarely defines what counts as a defect, who pays freight or how a batch problem is handled. The approval record should capture the configuration, production reference and acceptance checks agreed before the run — which is what the sample acceptance plan above is for.

## Quality and failure-mode questions

 Why does TUODI's TDL-6110X sensor light cost more than a similar-looking cabinet light?

 In the factory's own comparison, the compared TDL-6110X build uses a 9 mm anodised aluminium housing, a protected 3000 mAh lithium-polymer pack, a Senba PIR sensor, a custom constant-current PCBA with a complete charging stage, and 3M-branded adhesive in the described pack; the run adds a stated six-hour charge/ageing stage and a 5% shipment-lot sample. The comparison gives a defect rate at or below 0.3% for that build against 2-5% in unnamed samples. Request the test pack, agree the defect definition and confirm the exact build on your sample.

 How reliable is TUODI's claimed defect rate for the TDL-1915 and TDL-6110X versus cheaper alternatives?

 TUODI's own comparison puts its controlled defect rate below 0.4% for the TDL-1915 microwave switch and at or below 0.3% for the compared TDL-6110X build, versus 2–5% in unnamed lower-cost samples it says it tested. No comparator brand, sample size, test date or pass/fail definition came with those numbers, so read them as the factory's internal benchmark rather than an independently verified or market-wide figure, and request the underlying test data before you rely on them.

 What should I check on a TDL-6110X sample before approving a production order?

 For the 3000 mAh TDL-6110X configuration, confirm the housing and optics, the PIR component or an approved equivalent, battery chemistry, capacity and protection, the PCBA revision, the adhesive SKU, the ageing conditions and the lot-sampling method. TUODI's acceptance-plan builder turns those checks, plus your model, destination market and intended application, into one structured brief, so the sample is judged against criteria you agreed before production rather than a general impression afterwards.

 What are the most common failure modes reported for rechargeable cabinet lights?

 In an August 2026 sample of 42 retail reviews of rechargeable cabinet lights — none concerning TUODI products — the most-mentioned buyer complaints were battery, charging or electrical durability (7 of 42), adhesive or magnet mounting weakness (4 of 42), dead-on-arrival, switch or electronics failure (4 of 42), brightness shortfall or deterioration (3 of 42), and sensor timing, interference or activation (2 of 42). Counts are theme mentions rather than measured defect rates, and one review can raise several themes.

 Does TUODI's warranty cover the sensor light I want to order?

 Written periods are model-specific, not range-wide: the SR-M01 and SR-T01 faucet adapters carry a three-year factory warranty under 2026 terms, and the TDL-6110X in 30 and 40 cm carries one year on the current quotation. Ask for the period covering your exact model, then agree in writing what counts as a defect, the allowance, who pays freight and whether a failed batch is replaced or credited — those terms belong on your proforma invoice before production.

 Related: all buyer insights sample-to-scale ordering serviceable sensor-lighting design sensor selection guide Product Finder factory verification document gallery shipping check

 Notes

 Station checks to put on your order:

 Electronics production: confirm the quoted model’s PCBA revision, permitted substitutions and the record linking the board to production.
Repeatable fixture check: agree the function, sample quantity, conditions, pass limits and response if a unit fails.
Multi-unit and ageing checks: confirm the exact SKU, duration, operating state, sampled quantity and failure disposition before packing.
OEM marking control: approve artwork, size and location on a marked golden sample before production.

 Production and checking stations: for your order, tie each relevant station to the quoted model, sample plan and acceptance requirement.

 Put the practical terms on the proforma invoice: what counts as a failure, the allowance, freight responsibility, and whether the remedy is replacement in the next run or a credit. This gives the buyer a clearer operating agreement than a warranty label by itself.

========================================================================
# Buyer FAQ: MOQ, Samples, Certifications & OEM | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/faq/
Summary: Buyer answers on TUODI factory status, MOQ, samples, lead times, documents, OEM connectivity, spare parts, shipping, packaging and project verification.

Home › Buyer FAQ

## TUODI buyer FAQ: MOQ, samples, prices, OEM and shipping

 Straight answers on MOQ, samples, prices, OEM, documents, factory visits and shipping. If your model or market is not covered, ask us on WhatsApp. Replies usually within one business day.

 Jump to: MOQ and mixed trials · Ordering 100 pieces · TDL-6110X 30 and 40 cm prices · Samples · Battery runtime · Model documents · CE-EMC lengths · Replacement packs

## Is TUODI a manufacturer or a trading company?

 TUODI is a manufacturing business. The current production base is Guangdong Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd. in Sihui, Zhaoqing, which houses the production lines and a showroom. R&D, overseas sales, finance and a second showroom are in Shenzhen; the factory describes both sites as under one owner. TUODI International is the factory's international sales arm: the export desk for enquiries received through this website, coordinating quotations, samples, documents and freight in English. The legal manufacturer and document holder for your model are named on the quotation and proforma invoice.

## Why buy through TUODI International rather than contacting a factory directly?

 This export desk brings technical questions, sample arrangements, model-specific documents, packaging, manuals and freight planning into one English-language enquiry. RyanFulfil can coordinate courier, air, sea and selected dropship routes, or you can use your own forwarder. Prices include delivery within China; international freight is quoted separately. Agree the selected build, document scope, shipping responsibilities and after-sales terms before ordering. See who does what and the shipping guide.

## What does the factory actually make?

 LED motion-sensor lights (cabinet, wardrobe, stair and display lighting), PIR and microwave-radar sensor switches and modules, white noise machines, nursery night lights, rechargeable camping and work lights, and touchless faucet adapters. The sensing electronics are designed in-house — the company started as a sensor-switch maker in 2005 and holds 63 Chinese and 16 international patents.

## How many people work at TUODI today?

 Close to 60 (August 2026). Headcount rises in peak periods, so if you are planning a capacity or social-compliance audit, ask for the current roster and the production plan for your order. Production is in Zhaoqing; R&D, overseas sales and finance are in Shenzhen.

## What is the MOQ?

 It depends on the model and the customisation. There are four MOQ levels, not one: samples of stock models, stock product (small wholesale orders; mixed-model trials negotiable), logo & packaging (higher, set by printing minimums), and full custom development (project-specific). Send the model and your target quantity on WhatsApp and you get a concrete number for your level.

## Can I order 100 pieces?

 Often. Many indicative prices on this site are for 100–500 units, and mixed-model trials of stock product are negotiable. Some models are priced at a minimum of 1,000 units, such as the Big-Battery Cabinet Light (TDL-6108A), and a logo or custom packaging raises the minimum, set by printing minimums. Send the model and quantity; the quotation states the minimum for your model.

## How much do wholesale sensor lights and white noise machines cost?

 Indicative wholesale product prices, tiered by quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight is quoted separately:

Sensor cabinet lights (Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light TDL-6110X / Hand-Wave & Touch Cabinet Light IR / Radar Sensor Cabinet Light XWB) | US$4.91–13.57 / unit, 100–500 units; PIR: 12, 23 or 60 cm only; PIR 30 / 40 cm quoted separately; IR: 12, 23, 40 or 60 cm; radar: 24, 38 or 58 cm; Spliceable Remote-Control Cabinet Light (TDL-6110XRF-DJ) and Detachable-Battery Sensor Light (TDL-6111) on request

 Big-battery cabinet light (TDL-6108A) | US$9.14 / unit, minimum 1,000 units

 Battery sensor light bars (TDL-7120 class) | Price on request

 Picture light (TDL-7134IR) | US$8.87 / unit, 100–500 units

 Safe light (TDL-7127, white shell) | US$4.66 / white-shell unit, minimum 1,000 units; silver shell on request

 Detachable tube and ambient bars (TDL-8192 / 8193) | US$20.50 / 8192 unit, minimum 1,000 units; 8193B-5V / 12V on request

 White noise machines (MC220 / MC330 / MC550BL) | US$9.61–12.12 / unit, 100–500 units; MC220 US$9.61; MC550BL US$12.12; MC330 on request

 Clock and colour nursery lamps (MC550TIME / MC550RF) | MC550TIME US$9.40 / unit; MC550RF US$8.77 / unit; 100–500 units

 Camping and work lights (TD-CL04 / CL05 / TDL-6113) | CL04, CL05 and TDL-6113: price on request

 Carrot night light (LB-01) | Light without base US$4.60; light with lithium-battery base US$7.94 per unit, 100–500 units

 Sensor sconces (TDL-7136 / 7133) | 7136A/B US$5.85–7.94 / unit, 100–500 units; 7133A/B US$5.78–7.64 / unit, minimum 1,000 units

 Touchless faucet adapters (SR-M01 / SR-T01) | US$16.28 / unit, 100–500 units

 Compare the same model, configuration and order quantity — the five things that move the number.

 Exact pricing depends on quantity, customisation and destination — send model + quantity + country on WhatsApp and you'll have a firm product quotation, usually within one business day. Freight is quoted for the complete order once carrier acceptance for the exact configuration and battery is checked.

## Does the advertised TDL-6110X price apply to the 30 cm and 40 cm versions?

 No. The indicative US$4.91–13.05 a unit at 100–500 units covers the 12, 23 and 60 cm builds of the Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X). The 30 cm and 40 cm builds are quoted separately, per order: send the length and quantity for a price. See the TDL-6110X lengths.

## Can I get samples before ordering?

 Yes — sampling before a production order is the normal flow, and for OEM projects production only starts against a sample you have approved. Samples are quoted as one combined goods-and-shipping amount, with the preparation time for the selected model. A sample-fee credit may be agreed for a subsequent large order; where it is, the quotation states the eligible costs, credit amount and qualifying order.

## Which certifications do the products carry?

 Certification is model- and market-specific: products hold CE, RoHS, FCC, PSE (Japan) and UKCA documents, plus EU energy-label artwork for the LED under-cabinet light (TDL-7161). The Bluetooth white-noise platform has granted FCC ID 2A8ZP-MC330 and Japan Giteki radio certification R 219-248097. Put the exact model and destination on the quotation, then require complete current documents matched to both. For a battery product, require the freight forwarder to approve current transport documents matched to the model, cell, pack and route before booking. One exception: the sensor switch range is not certified as standard. Certification can sometimes be arranged per project; a lab quote is not a certificate. The Microwave Ceiling Switch (TDL-1915) has no radio certificate today.

## Do CE, RED, RoHS and UKCA documents cover the same models, and does TUODI hold any patents?

 They don’t automatically move together: CE (including RED for wireless/radio equipment), UKCA and RoHS are separate lab attestations, each naming its own list of models, and a document for one scheme does not imply another exists for the same model. Match your exact model against the named list on each document before ordering — see Certifications & Patents for the full set. Separately, TUODI (Shenzhen Tuodi Electronic Co., Ltd.) holds US Design Patent D872,339 S, granted 7 January 2020, protecting one lamp’s ornamental appearance; it is not tied to a specific model number and does not cover a platform’s function or a custom length developed for your project.

## Which cabinet-light lengths are on the CE-EMC document?

 CE-EMC certificate DLE-260814001C, valid only together with test report DLE-260814001R, names the Rechargeable PIR Cabinet Light (TDL-6110X) at 23, 40, 60, 80 and 90 cm. RoHS test report DLR-260814022R names the same entries. The 12 cm, 30 cm and custom lengths are not named. Before ordering for the EU, ask how the manufacturer's conformity assessment, technical documentation and EU declaration of conformity cover your exact build. See the certificate and its full model list.

## Do you do OEM / private label?

 Yes. Logo printing or engraving, custom colourways, giftbox and blister packaging, multi-language manuals, sensing-behaviour tuning, sound-library changes on white-noise products, and full custom development from your drawing or sample. Artwork, packaging and manual languages are agreed with production and checked before the run. See the OEM/ODM process.

## What should I include in my first RFQ?

 Start with the application, destination market, expected quantities, dimensions and finish, power input/output, sensing or control behaviour, customisation, required documents and five sample tests that must pass. Use the complete sensor-light manufacturer RFQ checklist for electrical loads, dry contacts, rechargeable batteries, connected systems, custom audio, OEM/ODM, certification, packing, freight and after-sales. Send only the sections relevant to your project.

## What are the lead times?

 Lead time depends on the product. As a guide: 3–5 days for samples, 20–25 days for standard bulk orders and 25–30 days for bulk orders with a custom logo or custom packaging, counted from when you place the order and pay for the goods. These are preparation and production estimates; shipping transit is additional. Your quotation states the lead time for your model. Confirm whether the quote counts calendar or working days. Your proforma invoice states the exact configuration and dated completion estimate; the planning figures are not guaranteed dispatch dates. Customisation, quantity, materials, packaging and season all move the date. Plan around Chinese New Year: most Chinese factories close for one to three weeks and the weeks either side run slow, so order first-quarter deliveries well ahead.

## How does shipping work?

 RyanFulfil coordinates courier, air, sea and selected dropship enquiries, and you can nominate your own forwarder. For initial planning use the parcel transit examples and full country table; these are not production or bulk sea-freight times. The quotation states the service, shipping basis, included charges and acceptance of the exact product and battery configuration. For a China-warehouse handoff, send the address, receiver, warehouse code, carton and label rules and booking deadline, and the quotation will state where responsibility transfers.

## Can I audit the factory?

 Yes. A live video walk-through of the production lines, SMT room and test lab can usually be arranged within days. For a production audit, visit the Zhaoqing base at Room 502, 5th Floor, Building B2, 41 Dawang Avenue, Dawang Hi-tech Zone, Zhaoqing Wanyang Zhongchuangcheng, Sihui City, Zhaoqing City, Guangdong, China 526200. Ask the sales team for the visitor entrance, gate pin and pickup plan before booking travel. Third-party inspection of production orders is supported.

## Can I meet TUODI in Shenzhen?

 Yes. TUODI keeps a showroom at its Shenzhen headquarters, where R&D, overseas sales and finance are based, and another at the Zhaoqing factory. Shenzhen suits a product or export meeting; Zhaoqing suits a production inspection. Arrange either with sales in advance.

## Where does TUODI export today?

 Roughly 68% of output is exported, with buyers across North and South America, Europe, Southeast and East Asia, Africa and Oceania. TUODI has exhibited at international lighting fairs including IstanbulLight in Turkey and lighting expos in Russia. Tell us your destination country and we confirm which documents that market needs for the model you are looking at, before you commit to a sample.

## How fast will I get a reply?

 Usually within one business day. WhatsApp is quickest. Include the model, quantity and destination country and the first reply will have substance, not a form response. You can also build the enquiry on the contact page: the page you were reading is attached to it, so the answer starts from the right model rather than a general one.

## Which currencies can I use for a quotation and payment?

 We can quote and accept payment in USD, EUR, GBP and SGD. Other currencies may be arranged; tell us your preference when requesting a quotation. No exchange rate, bank fee or financial service is promised here: the quotation states the currency, the amount and the payment terms. Orders can use the factory as seller of record or an arrangement coordinated by RyanFulfil. The quotation confirms the seller and invoice issuer.

## What are the payment terms?

 You pay the cost of goods in full when you place the order, and any other charges on your quotation in full before the goods ship. Nothing ships until every quoted charge is paid. The quotation and proforma invoice state the exact amount and currency.

## Quick answers

## How long do rechargeable motion sensor lights last per charge?

 Runtime depends on the selected battery, brightness, activation frequency, hold time and standby draw. Agree those conditions and measure the selected sample before making a battery-life claim. For the TDL-6110XRF-DJ spliceable system, confirm runtime on the exact bar and control configuration you plan to order.

## Do motion sensor lights turn on in daylight?

 Daylight thresholds are model- and mode-specific. TDL-6110XWB is one example, with a 10 lux threshold. For other models, ask for the threshold and whether light control is present and enabled on the selected build.

## What's the difference between PIR and microwave radar sensors?

 PIR detects moving body heat and generally needs line of sight. Radar is generally less affected by room temperature and may sense through some plastics or thin panels. Confirm panel material, sensor position and sensitivity on a sample in the actual cabinet. Try both in the interactive simulator.

## What is the difference between OEM and ODM?

 OEM: the factory builds an existing catalogue product with your branding, packaging and tweaks. ODM: the factory develops a new product to your specification — housing, firmware, sensing behaviour. TUODI runs both on a sample-first process: nothing goes to production until you've confirmed a physical sample. How a project runs →

## What certifications are needed to import LED sensor lights into the EU, UK or US?

 Typically CE marking for the EU, with RED coverage for wireless and radar; UKCA for Great Britain, though CE marking is still accepted there for this kind of equipment, so UKCA is usually optional rather than required. Northern Ireland follows EU rules (CE, or CE + UKNI where a UK body is involved). The US needs FCC compliance. Add RoHS substance limits and, for rechargeables, a UN 38.3 transport test summary. Put the exact model and market on the quotation and require the complete current document set to match both before committing to a sample or order.

## How much does a sample cost, and how fast does it ship?

 Samples are quoted as one combined goods-and-shipping amount. Sample preparation and transit are separate, and your sample quotation states model availability, preparation time and the current route. A sample-fee credit may be agreed for a subsequent large order. See the indicative parcel transit examples.

## What battery information should I ask for on a rechargeable sensor light?

 Ask for the exact model and length, cell chemistry, rated capacity, pack dimensions, protection functions, charging input and time, whether the product can operate while charging, and the runtime test basis. For shipping, map the current UN 38.3 test summary and MSDS/SDS to the actual cell in that build; a report for another cell does not cover the whole light family. Confirm printed mAh figures on your approved sample or through an agreed capacity check for the exact pack.

## Can one sensor control several cabinet-light bars?

 Only on a system designed for linked control. Standard rechargeable PIR or radar bars normally sense and time themselves independently. The TDL-6110XRF-DJ platform separates the sensor/remote from the joined light bars and synchronises a run; current factory guidance is best within six bars per remote. Other 2.4G interlinked wall and footlight formats also exist. Put the protocol, pairing count, response after power loss and maximum tested layout on the approved sample — do not assume every light in the TDL-6110 family can be paired.

## Can TUODI load custom sounds or add an SD card or app to a white-noise machine?

 Sound-library tuning is available on current platforms. An SD/TF slot, a new app, a custom PCB, a different button layout or dozens of your own tracks turns it into an ODM project. Before sampling, fix the model, file count and format, storage method, loop behaviour, maximum volume and how it is measured, timer logic, Bluetooth or app requirement, intended user age, applicable documents and who owns the firmware. Then approve the complete sound library and controls on a sample.

## Can TUODI make Zigbee, Z-Wave or Matter products, or log power outages?

 Treat it as an ODM feasibility question. The current range has proprietary RF/2.4G systems and one Tuya Wi-Fi sensor-switch variant. It has no standing Matter, Zigbee or Z-Wave range and no product that logs mains outages. Send a connected-product brief covering protocol and hub, commissioning, required events and timestamps, offline buffer, app/API ownership, firmware updates and destination radio documents. Then prove it on your real hub, including power and network cuts. See the connected-product brief.

## Can I buy accessories or replacement parts separately?

 Often, but compatibility depends on the exact model and revision. Ask for remotes, receivers, mounting plates, cables, battery modules, manuals or packaging by part number. The quotation states quantity, compatibility, lead time and continuity. TDL-6111 replacement battery packs can be ordered separately. Match the pack and connector to your exact light revision before ordering. The replacement pack has a one-year warranty; confirm its coverage, start date and freight terms in the quotation.

## What happens if an order contains defective products?

 Send photos or a short video so the factory can assess the issue. For a verified factory defect, replacement units can be included with your next shipment. The factory generally bears the costs, but the remedy and freight arrangement are agreed case by case. Confirm the arrangement in writing, including what happens if you have no further order planned. See the model-specific warranty guidance.

## How should I specify a sensor product for outdoor use or a hot, humid climate?

 Start with the real installation: indoor or outdoor, temperature, humidity, rain or wash-down, mounting height and mains range. Then ask for the model's operating limits and, for any IP marking, the named test report. No report means the number is the factory's own marking. Test sensing distance, false triggers, mounting retention, charging heat and relay load at your real extremes. The TDL-2086 and TDL-2076WB IP54 markings, for example, are factory markings, and both are indoor products.

## What packaging and compliance data should I request for EU or e-commerce sales?

 Keep packing data separate from legal obligations. Ask for unit-box and master-carton materials, quantities, dimensions and weights, accessory count, label and barcode fields, destination-language manuals, battery and product document mapping, and material declarations. Then agree the importer or responsible economic operator, and who files destination registrations. A factory supplying carton data does not become responsible for EPR, WEEE, battery, GPSR or marketplace compliance. Put the data owner on the quotation. EU starting points: product compliance, WEEE responsibilities and packaging. Confirm Member-State rules with a qualified adviser.

## Can rechargeable lights ship by air with lithium batteries?

 Yes, with current paperwork matched to the shipment rather than assumed. Air and sea classify lithium cells differently, transport documents expire, and a test summary covers one cell, not a catalogue. Before booking, require the freight forwarder to approve the current document set against the SKU, cell, pack, freight mode, route and quotation (see where we deliver). If a document needs reissuing, hold the booking until the replacement is current and approved for that shipment.

## Why do stick-on cabinet lights keep falling off?

 Usually the wrong mounting for the surface: adhesive that grips painted wood can fail on textured laminate or dusty melamine, and pulling the light off for charging stresses the bond. TUODI's magnetic bars reduce that stress: the 3M adhesive fixes a steel plate and the light attaches by magnet, so lifting it off to charge does not pull on the bond. On the 30 and 40 cm TDL-6110X the magnets have a recommended maximum load of 300 g; test pull-off and shear on your own cabinet finish before you commit. Sconces ship with adhesive pads and screws, so you choose per wall. Tell us your cabinet material and we'll recommend the route, including when a surface needs screws. See the quality comparison and sample plan.

## Why does a motion sensor light turn on by itself?

 Microwave radar may detect movement through some plastics or thin panels, so a closed cabinet door does not always block it. The result depends on panel material, sensor position and sensitivity. Test the selected sample in the actual cabinet; use PIR where line-of-sight behaviour is required. Daylight control is model- and mode-specific, so confirm it on the selected build. Compare the behaviours in the interactive sensor simulator.

## Do multiple sensor lights interfere with each other?

 Independent sensor lights each run their own detection and timing, which in corridors and wardrobe runs can mean staggered, inconsistent switching. Where a chain should behave as one system, TUODI's interlinked 2.4G family triggers the whole chain of wall and footlights from one sensor by design — the right tool for staircases and hotel corridors. How interlinked lighting works →

## Is a removable-battery cabinet light better than recharging the whole light?

 For fleets and furniture businesses, usually yes: with the TDL-6111 you charge the battery card, not the bar, so the light never leaves the cabinet, and the adhesive bond is never stressed. Replacement battery packs can be ordered separately; list the compatible pack for your selected build on the quotation. For single-home use, magnet-mounted bars that lift off for USB charging are simpler. Both formats are in the Product Finder.

## What's a realistic battery-life claim for a sensor light?

 Use a measured result for the exact build, with battery capacity, brightness, activations per day, hold time, standby draw and charging conditions recorded. A calculated estimate is useful for planning but does not establish product runtime. Use the battery runtime calculator and sample plan to define a scenario, then verify it on the selected sample.

## Who is TUODI?

 TUODI (拓迪) is a sensor-lighting and consumer-electronics brand whose company history includes Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd., incorporated in 2007. Shenzhen houses R&D, overseas sales, finance and a showroom; current manufacturing, the mainland-China operations team and a second showroom are at Guangdong Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd.'s production base in Sihui, Zhaoqing. So older documents may name Shenzhen while production is in Zhaoqing. tuodiinternational.com is the brand's overseas sales channel. Full company profile →

 Ask your question on WhatsApp

 Notes

 Quotation review: 13 September 2026. Indicative USD product prices depend on the selected model, configuration and quantity. Prices include delivery within China; international freight and tax are quoted separately. Custom packaging, payment terms and current price validity are confirmed on quotation.

 Headcount of close to 60 (August 2026) is the factory's own count.

 Related: what drives the price motion sensor cabinet light manufacturer white noise machine OEM camping light factory private label sensor lighting

========================================================================
# About TUODI & Its Zhaoqing Factory | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/about/
Summary: TUODI started in sensor switches in 2005, was incorporated in Shenzhen in 2007 and now makes sensor lighting in Zhaoqing. 79 granted patents, ~68% exported.

Home › About

## About TUODI: sensing electronics since 2005, with its factory in Zhaoqing, China

 TUODI® (拓迪) has built sensing electronics since 2005, when the founding team started with induction switches and wireless remote controls. Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics was incorporated in 2007, and manufacturing now runs at the Guangdong Tuodi plant in Sihui, Zhaoqing, established in 2020. 79 granted patents (63 Chinese, 16 international); about 68% of output is exported.

 Talk to the team on WhatsApp See the factory

## Milestones

 2005 | Founding team starts building induction switches and wireless remote controls in Foshan with 12 people; the founder is chief engineer

 2007 | Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd. incorporated

 2017 | TUODI exhibits at lighting expos in Russia and Turkey

 2020 | Guangdong Tuodi plant established in Zhaoqing with major equipment investment; current manufacturing is now located there

 2026 | Focus lines: white noise machines and camping lights alongside the core sensor-lighting platform; this international sales site launches

![Reception of Guangdong Tuodi Electronics at the Zhaoqing factory](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-reception-entrance.jpg)

## The company in brief

 Patents | 79 granted: 63 Chinese + 16 international

 Markets | North & South America, Europe, Southeast & East Asia, Africa, Oceania — ~68% of output exported

 Exhibitions | Lighting expos in Russia and Turkey since 2017 (stand photos)

 Team | Close to 60 employees, including in-house R&D engineers (August 2026); more in peak order periods.

 Products | LED sensor lights, PIR / microwave sensor switches & modules, white noise machines, night lights, camping & work lights, touchless faucet adapters

 Zhaoqing production base & showroom | Production lines and mainland-China operations
Guangdong Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd. (广东拓迪电子有限公司)
Room 502, 5th Floor, Building B2, 41 Dawang Avenue, Dawang Hi-tech Zone, Zhaoqing Wanyang Zhongchuangcheng, Sihui City, Zhaoqing City, Guangdong, China 526200

 Shenzhen headquarters & showroom | R&D, overseas sales and finance
No. 715, Block B, Tangshang Building, Xinqiao Street, Bao'an District, Shenzhen, Guangdong, China

 Company history | Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd. (深圳市拓迪电子有限公司), incorporated in 2007 (business licence)

 Visits | Meet the overseas team at the Shenzhen showroom or inspect production in Zhaoqing.

## The international sales desk

 TUODI International is the factory’s international sales arm. For enquiries received through tuodiinternational.com, the export desk coordinates quotations, samples, OEM/ODM, quality checks and logistics in English, working directly with the factory in Zhaoqing.

 Who does what for your order
 Manufacturing | Guangdong Tuodi Electronics in Zhaoqing is the current production base. The quotation names the legal manufacturer and document holder for the selected model.

 Enquiry coordination | TUODI International handles this website’s sales enquiries and coordinates samples, specifications and export arrangements with the factory.

 Seller and invoice issuer | Orders can use the factory as seller of record or an arrangement coordinated by RyanFulfil. The quotation confirms the seller and invoice issuer.

 Shipping | RyanFulfil-coordinated shipping, or your own forwarder. Prices include delivery within China; international freight is quoted separately, and your quotation states the route, charges and responsibilities. Shipping and country guidance.

 中文说明：合作关系与询盘分工

 Talk to the team

 Notes

 Company figures: the 2005 start in sensor switches and the ~68% export share are figures supplied by the factory. Incorporation in Shenzhen in 2007 is from the business licence.

 Shenzhen houses R&D, overseas sales, finance and a showroom; manufacturing, the mainland-China team and a second showroom are at the factory in Sihui, Zhaoqing. That is why older records and some certificates name Shenzhen.

 Before travelling, confirm the visitor entrance, gate pin and pickup plan directly.

========================================================================
# 拓迪合作与询盘分工 | TUODI International
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/tuodi-international-chinese/
Summary: 了解 TUODI International 网站询盘、工厂生产、报价卖方与物流协调的分工；具体订单以报价和对应文件为准。

首页 › 合作与询盘分工

## 合作关系与询盘分工

 TUODI International 是拓迪面向国际市场的销售业务窗口。对于通过本站收到的询盘，外贸服务团队以英语协助沟通报价、样品、OEM/ODM、质量检查与物流，并直接与肇庆工厂协调。

 每个订单以报价和对应文件确认
 事项 | 分工与确认方式

 产品制造 | 拓迪目前的生产基地位于肇庆，由广东拓迪电子有限公司运营。具体型号的法律制造商与文件持有人，以该型号的报价及对应文件为准。

 本站询盘 | TUODI International 接收本站的销售询盘，协调样品、规格及出口安排。

 卖方与开票方 | 订单可以由工厂作为卖方，也可以采用 RyanFulfil 协调的安排。实际卖方及开票方须在报价中明确。

 运输 | 可由 RyanFulfil 协调运输，也可使用您自己的货代；价格含中国境内送货，国际运费另行报价。运输路线、费用与责任须在报价中确认。

## 地点与到访

 拓迪的深圳地点承担研发、海外销售、财务与展厅功能；肇庆地点承担生产，并设有展厅。安排到访前，请先确认接待地点、入口与接送安排。

## 询价时请准备

 请提供产品型号、所需配置、数量、目的国家及用途。型号相近不代表配置或文件覆盖范围相同；确认订单时，应把选定配置、适用文件、报价与样品安排对应起来。

 订单以报价为准。 本页适用于通过本站联系的业务，不表示本站独家承接拓迪所有海外业务，也不构成对任一具体订单卖方、开票方或文件覆盖范围的预先确认。

 通过本站联系

 相关：About TUODI Shipping and country guidance

========================================================================
# Contact TUODI International | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/contact/
Summary: Contact the TUODI international sales team for quotations, samples, OEM/ODM projects, documents, a Shenzhen showroom meeting or a Zhaoqing factory visit.

Home › Contact

## Contact TUODI's international sales team

 WhatsApp is the fastest way to reach us — send the model (or a photo of what you need), your quantity and destination country, and you'll get pricing, MOQ and lead time from a real person, in English.

 WhatsApp: +86 178 4666 9989
Email: sales@tuodiinternational.com

 Chat on WhatsApp Build a detailed enquiry

## Build your enquiry

 Fill in what you know, then send an enquiry through the website or open a WhatsApp or email draft. Website submission gives an on-page reference after your request is stored. The page and recognised source labels accompany your enquiry. For an engineered or custom build, use the complete RFQ checklist first.

 Shortlist carried over. The models selected in Product Finder are below; edit them if the configuration changed.

 Specific model(s)

 Quantity (pcs)

 Destination country

 Branding needed?

 Not specified yet
 No branding — stock design
 Logo only
 Logo + custom packaging
 Full custom (housing / firmware / sounds)

 Open WhatsApp draft Open email draft

 Engineering or custom project? Add the full brief

 What do you need first?

 Not specified yet
 Price and MOQ
 Request a sample
 Certification for my country
 Match a product to my application
 Build a distributor range or mixed trial
 Specify a furniture integration programme
 Scope a hotel or project system
 Request an engineering module brief
 Discuss private label
 Shipping
 Arrange a live factory video call

 Product family

 Not specified yet
 Cabinet, wardrobe and display lighting
 White noise and night lighting
 Camping and work lighting
 Sensor switches and modules
 Water controls and faucet adapters
 Mixed product families
 OEM / ODM custom project

 Estimated annual volume

 Not specified yet
 Trial / first order only
 Up to 5,000 pcs/yr
 5,000–50,000 pcs/yr
 50,000+ pcs/yr

 Mutual NDA before technical exchange?

 Not specified yet
 Not needed
 Yes — request mutual NDA

 Buying scope (optional)

 Not specified yet
 Quote an existing catalogue model
 Request branding or packaging changes
 Check functional or hardware development feasibility

 Optional requirement briefs: open only what helps your enquiry. They describe your requirements; they are not promised product functions. Your entries stay editable in this page while you compare the briefs.

 Furniture and cabinet-light requirements (optional)

 Installation and available space

 Mounting and charging access

 When should the light turn on and off?

 Complete rechargeable-light questions →

 Sound-machine and private-label requirements (optional)

 Model, finish and intended use

 Audio or function requests

 Packaging and sample checks

 Complete sound-machine questions →

 Sensor-module and cabinet-control requirements (optional)

 Supply and actual load

 Output, wiring and connector

 Sensing action and installation

 Complete sensing and electrical questions →

 Selected light configurations
 These references identify the builds to quote. Uncheck a build to remove it from your enquiry; open specifications are stated on the quotation.

 Selected model length
 Uncheck this choice to remove it from your enquiry.

 Anything else

## Send this enquiry through the website

 Enter a reply email to send your requirements to TUODI. A successful submission shows a reference on this page. You can also open a WhatsApp or email draft below.

 Reply email (required for website submission)

 Company (optional)

 Sending stores your email, optional company and enquiry with TUODI’s website service and notifies its sales coordination inbox. We use them to handle your request. Website enquiry records are scheduled for deletion after 90 days, at the next successful cleanup. Your browser session contributes only recognised source labels and public page paths. Email correspondence and sales records may be retained separately; contact sales@tuodiinternational.com about your details. Cloudflare provides the submission and abuse-protection service; Cloudflare privacy information. How TUODI handles enquiry data.

 Send enquiry to TUODI
 Edit as a new enquiry

 Saved submission for retry
 Retry sends this saved version. Later field edits are included only when you choose “Edit as a new enquiry”. Keep this page open until you have a receipt. Closing it loses the retry key.

 Website submission needs JavaScript. Please email sales@tuodiinternational.com or use the WhatsApp link above.

 Your draft is prepared in this browser. Opening WhatsApp passes the draft to WhatsApp; opening email passes it to your chosen email app. Review and send it there. A draft reaches our desk only once you send it from WhatsApp or email.

 No WhatsApp or email app? Copy your enquiry and email sales@tuodiinternational.com using the service you prefer.

 Open WhatsApp draft
 Open email draft
 Copy enquiry

 Complete enquiry preview
 Copy this text, then paste it into your message to sales.

 Open WhatsApp without a draft · Open email without a draft

![Meeting room at the TUODI factory](https://www.tuodiinternational.com/assets/img/factory-meeting.jpg)

## Reach us

 Chat on WhatsApp

 WhatsApp | +86 178 4666 9989 — international sales (fastest)

 Email | sales@tuodiinternational.com

 Shenzhen headquarters & showroom | Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd.
R&D, overseas sales and finance
No. 715, Block B, Tangshang Building, Xinqiao Street, Bao'an District, Shenzhen, Guangdong, China
Search this address in Google Maps →

 Zhaoqing production base & showroom | Guangdong Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd.
Production lines and mainland-China operations
Room 502, 5th Floor, Building B2, 41 Dawang Avenue, Dawang Hi-tech Zone, Zhaoqing Wanyang Zhongchuangcheng, Sihui City, Zhaoqing City, Guangdong, China 526200
Search the production-base address in Google Maps →
Planning a visit? Agree the visitor entrance, gate pin and pickup plan with sales before travel.

 Hours | Replies usually within one business day (UTC+8)

 Who you contract with. Orders can use the factory as seller of record or an arrangement coordinated by RyanFulfil. The quotation confirms the seller and invoice issuer. Payment details are issued once, with that invoice, and never change by email. If anyone asks you to pay a different account, call the number above first.

 Samples and payment. We can quote and accept payment in USD, EUR, GBP and SGD. Other currencies may be arranged; tell us your preference when requesting a quotation. Samples are quoted as one combined goods-and-shipping amount. A sample-fee credit may be agreed for a subsequent large order; where it is, the quotation states the eligible costs, credit amount and qualifying order.

## What to include for a fast quote

 Model number (or a photo / description of the product)

 Quantity and target unit price if you have one

 Destination country — so we can confirm the certification documents your market needs for your model

 Branding needs: logo, packaging, custom requirements

 Notes

 The Shenzhen office handles overseas sales and the Zhaoqing factory makes the products; the factory describes both as under one owner. Because older certificates may name Shenzhen Tuodi Electronics, the legal manufacturer and document holder for your model are stated on the quotation and proforma invoice.

========================================================================
# Privacy: What a TUODI Enquiry Stores | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/privacy/
Summary: What TUODI's website keeps: enquiry records scheduled for deletion after 90 days, WhatsApp and email drafts, one sessionStorage key and Cloudflare analytics.

Home › Privacy

## What an enquiry to TUODI stores

 This notice explains what happens to the details you give when you ask TUODI International about products, samples or orders, and what your browser keeps while you read this website. Effective 15 September 2026, last reviewed 16 September 2026.

 In three lines. A website submission from the contact page is stored with Cloudflare and scheduled for deletion after 90 days. A WhatsApp or email draft travels only when you send it yourself, through the app you chose. To see, correct or delete what the desk holds about you, write to sales@tuodiinternational.com.

## Who runs this website

 tuodiinternational.com is run by RyanFulfil, based in Singapore, which is responsible for the personal data in enquiries sent through this site. TUODI International is the factory's international sales arm; the website's export desk handles the enquiries this site receives and coordinates quotations, samples and export arrangements in English. Guangdong Tuodi Electronics Co., Ltd. in Zhaoqing manufactures the products. If you go on to order, your quotation names the seller and the invoice issuer, which can be the factory or an arrangement coordinated by RyanFulfil. Questions about your details, and requests for privacy purposes, go to sales@tuodiinternational.com.

## What reaches the desk, and only when you send it

## Sending an enquiry through the website

 The contact page has a "Send enquiry to TUODI" button. Pressing it sends your reply email (required), your company name (optional) and the requirements you filled in, which can include a model, a product category and a destination country. It also sends the recognised source and landing-page labels described under what your browser keeps. No files are uploaded and no cookies are sent with the request.

 TUODI's website service runs on Cloudflare. It checks the request, stores it in a Cloudflare database with the time it arrived, and shows you a reference number on the page. A reference number means the enquiry was stored; it is not a quotation. Each stored enquiry is then emailed, with the details above, to the desk's sales coordination inbox so that someone can reply. The service does not send you an automatic email.

 Website enquiry records are scheduled for deletion 90 days after they arrive, at the next successful cleanup run. The notification email and any correspondence that follows are kept separately; see how long things are kept.

## Protection against automated submissions

 The contact page loads Cloudflare Turnstile, a check that separates people from automated traffic, and the service confirms that check with Cloudflare before it stores a new enquiry. To limit repeated sending, the service also turns your internet (IP) address into a coded counter using a secret key at the moment you submit. The address itself is not stored. Those counters expire after 24 hours and are then scheduled for deletion.

## WhatsApp, email and copied drafts

 The WhatsApp buttons on every page, and the email and copy buttons on the contact page, prepare a message inside your browser. Before the draft opens, a short context block is added to it: the heading and address of the page you are on, and the recognised first and most recent source, campaign and landing-page labels. You can read and change the whole draft first. Nothing reaches the desk until you send it. WhatsApp, or the email service you use, then carries the message under its own terms. The desk's WhatsApp number is +86 178 4666 9989; email to sales@tuodiinternational.com is forwarded to the same sales coordination inbox.

 WhatsApp messages you send us are kept with no fixed deletion date, in the WhatsApp conversation itself. We use them only to answer your enquiry, prepare a quotation, arrange samples and handle your order, and not for any other purpose.

## What your browser keeps

 Name | Where and what | How long

 tuodi_rfq_attribution_v1 | The browser's per-tab sessionStorage, written by this site's own script on every page. It holds the first and most recent source label (direct, google, bing, chatgpt, perplexity, xiuben or unknown), the campaign label (lighting_range_comparison or unknown) and the landing page, chosen from this site's own list of pages. It holds nothing you type. | Until you close that tab, when the browser clears it

 The entry is written when you arrive so that a draft or a website submission can say what kind of link brought you here. It leaves your browser only inside a message or submission you choose to send, and it never contains your name, email address or search terms. The same script removes two older entries, tuodi_first_touch and tuodi_first_touch_source, if an earlier visit left them behind.

 The site's own code sets no cookies and uses no local storage. Fonts and product videos are served from this website, address links to Google Maps open Google's site only when you click them, and no advertising or social-media pixels are loaded. Cloudflare Turnstile on the contact page and the Cloudflare Web Analytics script described below run Cloudflare's code in your browser under Cloudflare's own terms.

## Cloudflare Web Analytics and hosting records

 Cloudflare hosts this website. As of 15 September 2026, Cloudflare adds its Web Analytics script, loaded from static.cloudflareinsights.com, to pages as they are served. The script sends page-view and page-load performance measurements to Cloudflare, which shows the desk summary figures about how the site is used. Cloudflare states that Web Analytics "does not use any client-side state, such as cookies or localStorage, to collect usage metrics" and that it does not "fingerprint" individuals by IP address, browser details or other data for its analytics (Cloudflare Web Analytics, read 15 September 2026).

 Like any web host, Cloudflare processes each request, including your IP address and browser details, to deliver pages and protect the site. The enquiry service is configured to strip query strings from its operational logs, not to record a log entry for every request, and not to write error details that could contain what you submitted.

## Why your details are used

 Answering your enquiry, preparing a quotation, arranging samples and handling an order are steps you ask for before a possible contract (GDPR and UK GDPR Article 6(1)(b)). Following up a business enquiry, keeping the enquiry service working, protecting it from abuse and seeing which pages lead to enquiries are the desk's legitimate interests in running an export sales service (Article 6(1)(f)); the data involved is limited to what this page lists.

 You can read this website without giving any personal details. A website submission needs a reply email, and without some way to contact you the desk cannot answer or quote. No decision about you is made automatically, apart from the bot check and submission limits above, which decide only whether a website submission is accepted.

## Who else receives something

 Cloudflare: website hosting, Web Analytics, Turnstile, the enquiry database and the service that sends the notification email.

 The mailbox provider behind the sales coordination inbox, which receives the notification and email sent to sales@tuodiinternational.com.

 WhatsApp, or your own email provider, when you send a draft through them.

 The factory, which receives the product requirements it needs to quote, sample or make your order.

 If you order, the carrier or forwarder moving the goods, which receives the delivery contact you give for that shipment.

 Your details may be handled outside your own country: the factory is in China, and Cloudflare, WhatsApp and email providers run their services across several countries. If your organisation needs a data transfer agreement before it shares personal details, say so before you send them.

## How long things are kept

 Website enquiry record | Scheduled for deletion 90 days after it arrives, at the next successful cleanup run

 Abuse-protection counters | Expire after 24 hours, then scheduled for deletion

 tuodi_rfq_attribution_v1 in your browser | Until you close that tab

 WhatsApp messages | No fixed deletion date; used only to answer your enquiry, quote, arrange samples and handle your order, never for any other purpose

 Notification email, correspondence and sales records | Kept separately from the website record; write to sales@tuodiinternational.com to ask about them

 Analytics and hosting records | Held by Cloudflare under its own terms

## Your rights and how to use them

 You can ask what the desk holds about you and ask for it to be corrected or deleted, for its use to be restricted, for follow-up to stop, or for a copy in a portable format. Write to sales@tuodiinternational.com from the address you used, or tell us the WhatsApp number you messaged from. The same applies if a colleague or a forwarder passed your details to us.

 If you are in the European Union or the United Kingdom and are not satisfied with the answer, you can complain to a data protection authority: in the United Kingdom, the Information Commissioner's Office; in the European Union, the authority in your own country.

 Data protection contact: sales@tuodiinternational.com.

## Changes to this notice

 This notice describes the website and its enquiry service as they worked on 15 September 2026, updated 16 September 2026 to name the entity responsible for enquiry data and the WhatsApp retention practice. If the site begins to collect something new, this page is updated before that collection starts.

 Related: contact and enquiry form buyer FAQ

========================================================================
# TUODI Configuration Reference | Published Builds
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/configurations/
Summary: TUODI TDL-6111 configuration references: published factory specifications for each configured span and the code to quote in your enquiry.

Home > TUODI configuration reference

## TUODI configuration reference
Each reference lists the factory specifications of one TDL-6111 configured span and the code to quote in your enquiry.
TDL-6111 — 35 cm configured span
TDL-6111 — 54 cm configured span
How to use the reference · Machine-readable index

========================================================================
# TDL-6111 Short Configuration Reference | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/configurations/tdl-6111-35cm/
Summary: TDL-6111 short configured span: published factory specifications, reference revision and the code to quote in your TUODI enquiry.

Home > Configuration reference > TDL-6111 — 35 cm configured span

## TDL-6111 — 35 cm configured span
The published reference for this configured span: its factory specifications, the code to quote in your enquiry and the full record.
Prepare enquiry for tdl-6111-35cm

## Factory specifications

TDL-6111 — 35 cm configured spanField | Details
Configured span | 35 cm
Light section length | 25 cm
Battery card length | 10 cm
Light section dimensions | 250 × 38 × 9 mm
Power | 1.3 W
Power tolerance | ±10%
Light output | 136 lm
Battery design | Detachable battery card
Mounting | Magnetic mounting with adhesive steel plates
Dimming | Long-press dimming
Weight per set | 210 g
Neutral box dimensions | 265 × 50 × 40 mm
Sets per carton | 60 sets
Carton dimensions | 425 × 270 × 300 mm
Carton weight | 13 kg

Factory specifications. Values not listed are stated on your quotation. Configuration reference: tdl-6111-35cm@3.

Enquire about 35 cm configured span

Full configuration record
Confirm the selections and open questions below before ordering. This is a published reference, not a fully specified production SKU.

## 35 cm configured span

Configuration reference: tdl-6111-35cm@3.

Factory specification: 25 cm light section plus 10 cm battery card. Please confirm the selected build on the quotation.

TDL-6111 — 35 cm configured spanField | Details
Configured span | 35 cm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Light section length | 25 cm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Battery card length | 10 cm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Light section dimensions | 250 × 38 × 9 mm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Power | 1.3 W — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Power tolerance | ±10% — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Light output | 136 lm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Battery capacity | To be confirmed on your quotation.
LED count | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Hold time | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Sensing pack | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Charging connector | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Colour temperature | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Battery cell | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Factory build reference | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Runtime under agreed use conditions | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Separate replacement-card supply | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Weight per set | 210 g — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Neutral box dimensions | 265 × 50 × 40 mm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Sets per carton | 60 sets — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Carton dimensions | 425 × 270 × 300 mm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Carton weight | 13 kg — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Battery design | Detachable battery card — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Mounting | Magnetic mounting with adhesive steel plates — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Dimming | Long-press dimming — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.

DLE-260814001C — Lab attestation. Family named; selected build still needs matching.
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; issued 17 August 2026.
Expiry date is not recorded; check the full document.
Named subjects: TDL-6110X, 6110X-IR, 6110XRF-DJ, 6110XWB, 6111, 6112, 6113, 6118, 6108.
Family named; selected build still needs matching.
This EMC document is listed for the named model families; ask for the full document to check the length and battery build in your quotation.
Coverage of either selected TDL-6111 configuration still needs matching to the full document.
Do not use this EMC document to confirm battery capacity, runtime, water resistance, electrical safety or battery transport acceptance.
Request the full document and underlying test reports.
Ask whether the document covers the exact build in your quotation.
Request only: Full document and underlying test reports.
View the published document preview

Enquire about 35 cm configured span

Orders can use the factory as seller of record or an arrangement coordinated by RyanFulfil. The quotation confirms the seller and invoice issuer.
Page reference: TD:tdl-6111-35cm:r7eb4add97c2b:pc6820e811b55:m1
Current JSON record · This record revision · Download this reference · Compare the model family
Reference scope and corrections
Prepare enquiry for tdl-6111-35cm

========================================================================
# TDL-6111 Long Configuration Reference | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/configurations/tdl-6111-54cm/
Summary: TDL-6111 long configured span: published factory specifications, reference revision and the code to quote in your TUODI enquiry.

Home > Configuration reference > TDL-6111 — 54 cm configured span

## TDL-6111 — 54 cm configured span
The published reference for this configured span: its factory specifications, the code to quote in your enquiry and the full record.
Prepare enquiry for tdl-6111-54cm

## Factory specifications

TDL-6111 — 54 cm configured spanField | Details
Configured span | 54 cm
Light section length | 40 cm
Battery card length | 14 cm
Light section dimensions | 400 × 38 × 9 mm
Power | 2 W
Power tolerance | ±10%
Light output | 208 lm
Battery capacity | 3000 mAh
LED count | 146 LEDs
Hold time | 15 s
Battery design | Detachable battery card
Mounting | Magnetic mounting with adhesive steel plates
Dimming | Long-press dimming
Weight per set | 300 g
Neutral box dimensions | 415 × 50 × 40 mm
Sets per carton | 30 sets
Carton dimensions | 425 × 270 × 300 mm
Carton weight | 10 kg

Factory specifications. Values not listed are stated on your quotation. Configuration reference: tdl-6111-54cm@3.

Enquire about 54 cm configured span

Full configuration record
Confirm the selections and open questions below before ordering. This is a published reference, not a fully specified production SKU.

## 54 cm configured span

Configuration reference: tdl-6111-54cm@3.

Factory specification: 40 cm light section plus 14 cm battery card. Please confirm the selected build on the quotation.

TDL-6111 — 54 cm configured spanField | Details
Configured span | 54 cm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Light section length | 40 cm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Battery card length | 14 cm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Light section dimensions | 400 × 38 × 9 mm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Power | 2 W — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Power tolerance | ±10% — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Light output | 208 lm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Battery capacity | 3000 mAh — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
LED count | 146 LEDs — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Hold time | 15 s — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Sensing pack | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Charging connector | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Colour temperature | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Battery cell | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Factory build reference | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Runtime under agreed use conditions | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Separate replacement-card supply | To be confirmed on your quotation.
Weight per set | 300 g — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Neutral box dimensions | 415 × 50 × 40 mm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Sets per carton | 30 sets — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Carton dimensions | 425 × 270 × 300 mm — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Carton weight | 10 kg — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Battery design | Detachable battery card — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Mounting | Magnetic mounting with adhesive steel plates — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.
Dimming | Long-press dimming — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.

DLE-260814001C — Lab attestation. Family named; selected build still needs matching.
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; issued 17 August 2026.
Expiry date is not recorded; check the full document.
Named subjects: TDL-6110X, 6110X-IR, 6110XRF-DJ, 6110XWB, 6111, 6112, 6113, 6118, 6108.
Family named; selected build still needs matching.
This EMC document is listed for the named model families; ask for the full document to check the length and battery build in your quotation.
Coverage of either selected TDL-6111 configuration still needs matching to the full document.
Do not use this EMC document to confirm battery capacity, runtime, water resistance, electrical safety or battery transport acceptance.
Request the full document and underlying test reports.
Ask whether the document covers the exact build in your quotation.
Request only: Full document and underlying test reports.
View the published document preview

Enquire about 54 cm configured span

Orders can use the factory as seller of record or an arrangement coordinated by RyanFulfil. The quotation confirms the seller and invoice issuer.
Page reference: TD:tdl-6111-54cm:r97cef0cf3a28:p5668400ab241:m1
Current JSON record · This record revision · Download this reference · Compare the model family
Reference scope and corrections
Prepare enquiry for tdl-6111-54cm

========================================================================
# Configuration Reference: Scope & Revisions | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/configuration-reference-policy/
Summary: Understand TUODI configuration identifiers, retained record revisions, unresolved specifications, document limits and how to request a correction.

Home > Configuration reference > Reference policy

## TDL-6111 configuration references and how to use them

Use the current configuration reference to compare the selected build with the quotation. These website identifiers distinguish product options; they are not factory SKUs or independent test results.

## Use the quotation as the order definition

The quotation sets the sensing pack, connector, colour settings, battery option and every open specification. A document carrying a model name does not by itself show that the selected configuration was assessed. Ask for stock availability, compatibility and spare-part supply for the quoted build.

The quotation names the seller and invoice issuer, whether the order is placed with the factory or coordinated through RyanFulfil.

## Identifiers and revisions

Configuration identifiers are website references, not factory SKUs. A record revision identifies published information; it is separate from a physical build revision. A changed battery, connector or sensing pack needs an explicit identity and scope review. An updated website record does not amend an agreed order.

Check the current record and product information updates before relying on a saved summary. Retained JSON revisions are historical references, not current offers.

## Page references in enquiries

Include the page reference in your enquiry so the selected configuration can be matched against the current record and quotation. The reference identifies website content only; it does not record acceptance or prove that an enquiry was sent.

## Machine-readable fields

The JSON index links the current selection summary and retained revisions. In the schema, a pending field means that the item must be confirmed on the quotation. Treat quoted specifications as values to confirm on the selected configuration and sample. Treat unfamiliar statuses and schema versions as unsupported. Do not replace an unknown value with zero or with a family-level figure. If no document is mapped, request the applicable document for the exact quoted configuration.

## Corrections and reuse

When sharing a reference, retain its source URL, revision and unresolved questions. Send specification discrepancies to sales@tuodiinternational.com before ordering. Access to a record does not grant rights to reproduce underlying reports, images or trademarks.

========================================================================
# Earlier TUODI Warehouse Tour (Company History) | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/video-warehouse-tour/
Summary: A 63-second earlier warehouse tour kept as TUODI company history. It shows a previous site, not the current Zhaoqing factory.

Home › Factory › Earlier TUODI warehouse tour

## Earlier TUODI warehouse tour

 A 63-second earlier warehouse tour kept as TUODI company history. It shows a previous site, not the current Zhaoqing factory.

 Earlier TUODI warehouse tour — company history, not the current factory. 63 seconds.

 Return to the factory page for the rest of the gallery.

 Ask for a live walk-through on WhatsApp

 Other clips: Current Zhaoqing production floor TUODI factory photometric lab TUODI factory illuminated fixture check TUODI factory laser marking process
 Related: Product Finder certifications start an enquiry

========================================================================
# Zhaoqing Production Floor Walkthrough | TUODI Factory
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/video-production-floor/
Summary: A 44-second walk through production and testing at Guangdong Tuodi Electronics in Zhaoqing. It shows the floor in use, not a test result.

Home › Factory › Current Zhaoqing production floor

## Current Zhaoqing production floor

 A 44-second walk through production and testing at Guangdong Tuodi Electronics in Zhaoqing. It shows the floor in use, not a test result.

 Current Zhaoqing production floor — 44 seconds of production and testing at Guangdong Tuodi Electronics.

 Return to the factory page for the rest of the gallery.

 Ask for a live walk-through on WhatsApp

 Other clips: Earlier TUODI warehouse tour TUODI factory photometric lab TUODI factory illuminated fixture check TUODI factory laser marking process
 Related: Product Finder certifications start an enquiry

========================================================================
# Photometric Lab: Integrating Sphere & Test Cabinet | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/video-photometric-lab/
Summary: An 8-second pan across the integrating sphere and photometric test cabinet at the Zhaoqing factory. It shows the equipment present, not a test result.

Home › Factory › TUODI factory photometric lab

## TUODI factory photometric lab

 An 8-second pan across the integrating sphere and photometric test cabinet at the Zhaoqing factory. It shows the equipment present, not a test result.

 Photometric lab — an 8-second pan across the integrating sphere and test cabinet at the Zhaoqing factory.

 Return to the factory page for the rest of the gallery.

 Ask for a live walk-through on WhatsApp

 Other clips: Earlier TUODI warehouse tour Current Zhaoqing production floor TUODI factory illuminated fixture check TUODI factory laser marking process
 Related: Product Finder certifications start an enquiry

========================================================================
# Illuminated Fixture Check Station | TUODI Factory Video
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/video-fixture-check/
Summary: A 6-second clip of a gloved operator using an illuminated fixture station. It shows the station in use, not a test limit, sampling plan or result.

Home › Factory › TUODI factory illuminated fixture check

## TUODI factory illuminated fixture check

 A 6-second clip of a gloved operator using an illuminated fixture station. It shows the station in use, not a test limit, sampling plan or result.

 Illuminated fixture check — a gloved operator uses the factory's functional-check station.

 Return to the factory page for the rest of the gallery.

 Ask for a live walk-through on WhatsApp

 Other clips: Earlier TUODI warehouse tour Current Zhaoqing production floor TUODI factory photometric lab TUODI factory laser marking process
 Related: Product Finder certifications start an enquiry

========================================================================
# Laser Marking a Private-Label Housing | TUODI Factory
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/video-laser-marking/
Summary: A 13-second clip of a TUODI mark being laser-applied to an aluminium light housing. It shows the marking process only.

Home › Factory › TUODI factory laser marking process

## TUODI factory laser marking process

 A 13-second clip of a TUODI mark being laser-applied to an aluminium light housing. It shows the marking process only.

 Laser marking — a TUODI mark is applied to an aluminium light housing.

 Return to the factory page for the rest of the gallery.

 Ask for a live walk-through on WhatsApp

 Other clips: Earlier TUODI warehouse tour Current Zhaoqing production floor TUODI factory photometric lab TUODI factory illuminated fixture check
 Related: Product Finder certifications start an enquiry

========================================================================
# Connected Switch Test Workstation | TUODI Factory Video
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/video-switch-bench/
Summary: A 9-second clip of a connected switch test workstation in use. It shows the station, not a model-specific pass result.

Home › Factory › TUODI connected switch test workstation

## TUODI connected switch test workstation

 A 9-second clip of a connected switch test workstation in use. It shows the station, not a model-specific pass result.

 Connected switch test bench — an operator works with connected switch units at the bench.

 Return to the factory page for the rest of the gallery.

 Ask for a live walk-through on WhatsApp

 Other clips: Earlier TUODI warehouse tour Current Zhaoqing production floor TUODI factory photometric lab TUODI factory illuminated fixture check
 Related: Product Finder certifications start an enquiry

========================================================================
# Zhaoqing Reception & Meeting Rooms Walkthrough | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/video-reception-tour/
Summary: A 34-second walk from the entrance of Guangdong Tuodi Electronics past the reception and certificate wall to the meeting rooms where buyer visits start.

Home › Factory › TUODI Zhaoqing reception, certificate wall and meeting rooms

## TUODI Zhaoqing reception, certificate wall and meeting rooms

 A 34-second walk from the entrance of Guangdong Tuodi Electronics past the reception and certificate wall to the meeting rooms where buyer visits start.

 Zhaoqing reception, certificate wall and meeting rooms — a 34-second walk from the entrance.

 Return to the factory page for the rest of the gallery.

 Ask for a live walk-through on WhatsApp

 Other clips: Earlier TUODI warehouse tour Current Zhaoqing production floor TUODI factory photometric lab TUODI factory illuminated fixture check
 Related: Product Finder certifications start an enquiry

========================================================================
# LB-01 Carrot Night Light Demonstration | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/video-carrot-night-light/
Summary: Factory footage of the LB-01 carrot night light in its plug-in and tabletop builds, glowing in a dark room. 33 seconds, product in use.

Home › Night Lights › TUODI LB-01 carrot night light demonstration

## TUODI LB-01 carrot night light demonstration

 Factory footage of the LB-01 carrot night light in its plug-in and tabletop builds, glowing in a dark room. 33 seconds, product in use.

 Carrot night light — factory footage of the plug-in and tabletop builds, glowing in a dark room.

 Return to the night lights page for the rest of the gallery, or ask for the detail you need on your own models.

 Other clips: Earlier TUODI warehouse tour Current Zhaoqing production floor TUODI factory photometric lab TUODI factory illuminated fixture check
 Related: Product Finder certifications start an enquiry

========================================================================
# MC550 Clock Variant Demonstration | TUODI Night Lights
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/video-mc550-clock/
Summary: An 18-second clip of the MC550 clock variant on a desk, showing the clock readout and touch dimming. It shows the product in use, not a runtime or test result.

Home › Night Lights › TUODI MC550 clock variant demonstration

## TUODI MC550 clock variant demonstration

 An 18-second clip of the MC550 clock variant on a desk, showing the clock readout and touch dimming. It shows the product in use, not a runtime or test result.

 MC550 clock variant — factory footage of the clock readout and touch dimming on a desk.

 Return to the night lights page for the rest of the gallery, or ask for the detail you need on your own models.

 Other clips: Earlier TUODI warehouse tour Current Zhaoqing production floor TUODI factory photometric lab TUODI factory illuminated fixture check
 Related: Product Finder certifications start an enquiry

========================================================================
# TDL-7148 Light Bars on an Ageing Run | TUODI Factory
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/video-tdl-7148-ageing-run/
Summary: A 31-second bench ageing run on TDL-7148 60 cm supply-powered cabinet light bars, switched by hand sweep and stepped through three colour temperatures.

Home › Factory › Supply-Powered Cabinet Light Bars (TDL-7148) on an ageing run

## Supply-Powered Cabinet Light Bars (TDL-7148) on an ageing run

A 31-second bench ageing run on Supply-Powered Cabinet Light Bars (TDL-7148), 60 cm, switched by hand sweep and stepped through three colour temperatures. It shows the bars running, not a test duration, limit or result.

 TDL-7148 60 cm bars powered from a socket strip for an ageing run — the operator sweeps a hand over a bar to switch it and steps one bar from cool white through to warm white.

## What you can take from the clip

 These bars run on a power supply, not a battery. The cable to the socket strip is the supply, not a charging lead; the range covers 5 V and 24 V builds, so name the one your installation can feed.

 Hand sweep, not motion detection. An open hand passing over the bar switches it — the behaviour to check on a display or work surface where a motion sensor would false-trigger.

 Three colour temperatures with adjustable brightness, stepped at the sensor head. Confirm the exact Kelvin values and whether dimming is stepped or stepless on your sample.

 An ageing run is not a documented test. No duration, pass limit or result is shown here. Production ageing for an order runs on the factory's ageing racks; put the stage, its duration and the pass limit on your inspection plan.

 TDL-7148 is named on the UKCA / EMC attestation LCSB070323005E for "LED Under Cabinet Light" — see the document records for its scope, and ask for the document set covering your length, supply voltage and destination market.

 This bar is not one of the configured builds on the sensor cabinet light pages, which are rechargeable. Ask for the current TDL-7148 lengths, supply voltage, mounting and sensing behaviour and we will put them on a quotation: ask about TDL-7148. Compare TDL-7148 in the Product Finder →

 Return to the factory page for the rest of the production and quality-control footage.

 Other clips: Current Zhaoqing production floor TUODI factory photometric lab TUODI factory illuminated fixture check Connected switch test workstation
 Related: Product Finder certifications start an enquiry

========================================================================
# Product Information Updates | TUODI
URL: https://www.tuodiinternational.com/updates/
Summary: Current TUODI buyer notices for product selection, configuration scope, document checks and quotations. Follow the Atom or JSON feed.

Home > Buyer notices

## Product buyer notices

Current buyer notices for product selection, configuration, document scope and quotations.

Use each notice with the linked product page and the current quotation for your selected build.

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

Follow these notices: Atom feed · JSON feed.

8 October 2026

## TDL-6111-35CM — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

Configuration reference: tdl-6111-35cm@3.

Affected pages: Tdl 6111 detachable battery sensor light · Sensor cabinet lights

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

9 September 2026

## PRODUCT INFORMATION — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

Say which battery format you need — dry cell, built-in rechargeable, or a removable card. Include it with the length, controls, included parts, quantity and commercial basis so the quotations compare the same configuration.

Affected pages: Pricing guide

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

8 September 2026

## TDL-6111 — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

Charging connector To be confirmed on your quotation.

Affected pages: Sensor cabinet lights

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

8 September 2026

## TDL-6111-54CM — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

54 cm: 3000 mAh — factory specification; confirm on your quotation.

Affected pages: Wardrobe closet lighting

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

8 September 2026

## PRODUCT INFORMATION — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

Five comparisons to make before choosing a quotation

Affected pages: Pricing guide

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

8 September 2026

## TDL-6111-35CM — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

Factory specification: 25 cm light section plus 10 cm battery card. Please confirm the selected build on the quotation.

Affected pages: Sensor cabinet lights

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

8 September 2026

## TDL-6111 — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

Illustration of the removable-card design. Confirm the battery capacity for the selected build on the quotation.

Affected pages: Home · Tdl 6111 detachable battery sensor light

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

8 September 2026

## TDL-6111-35CM — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

35 cm: Battery capacity to be confirmed on your quotation.

Affected pages: Products

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

8 September 2026

## TDL-6111-35CM — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

Battery capacity To be confirmed on your quotation.

Affected pages: Sensor cabinet lights

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

8 September 2026

## TDL-6111 — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

This EMC document is listed for the named model families; ask for the full document to check the length and battery build in your quotation.

Affected pages: Tdl 6111 detachable battery sensor light · Sensor cabinet lights

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.

8 September 2026

## PRODUCT INFORMATION — Buyer notice

Buyer notice

Sensor-light construction and sample verification

Affected pages: Reliability

Confirm the selected build, specifications and document coverage on your quotation.